Component Replacement 5116374_18

GE Healthcare
gehealthcare.com
Technical
Publication
5116374
Revision 18
HiSpeed Dual, ProSpeed FII

Component Replacement
Copyright © 2004-2011 by General Electric Company
Operating Documentation
GE HEALTHCARE COMPONENT REPLACEMENT
REV 16 5116374
警告 • 本维修手册仅提供英文版本。
(ZH-CN) • 如果维修服务提供商需要非英文版本，客户需自行提供翻译服务。
• 未详细阅读和完全理解本维修手册之前，不得进行维修。
• 忽略本警告可能对维修人员，操作员或患者造成触电、机械伤害或其他形式的
伤害。
VÝSTRAHA • Tento provozní návod existuje pouze v anglickém jazyce.

• V případě, že externí služba zákazníkům potřebuje návod v jiném jazyce, je
(CS) zajištění překladu do odpovídajícího jazyka úkolem zákazníka.
• Nesnažte se o údržbu tohoto zařízení, aniž byste si přečetli tento provozní
návod a pochopili jeho obsah.
• V případě nedodržování této výstrahy může dojít k poranění pracovníka
prodejního servisu, obslužného personálu nebo pacientů vlivem elektrického
proudu, respektive vlivem mechanických či jiných rizik.
ADVARSEL • Denne servicemanual findes kun på engelsk.

• Hvis en kundes tekniker har brug for et andet sprog end engelsk, er det
(DA) kundens ansvar at sørge for oversættelse.
• Forsøg ikke at servicere udstyret medmindre denne servicemanual har været
konsulteret og er forstået.
• Manglende overholdelse af denne advarsel kan medføre skade på grund af
elektrisk, mekanisk eller anden fare for teknikeren, operatøren eller patienten.
WAARSCHUWING • Deze onderhoudshandleiding is enkel in het Engels verkrijgbaar.

• Als het onderhoudspersoneel een andere taal vereist, dan is de klant
(NL) verantwoordelijk voor de vertaling ervan.
• Probeer de apparatuur niet te onderhouden voordat deze
onderhoudshandleiding werd geraadpleegd en begrepen is.
• Indien deze waarschuwing niet wordt opgevolgd, zou het
onderhoudspersoneel, de operator of een patiënt gewond kunnen raken als
gevolg van een elektrische schok, mechanische of andere gevaren.
WARNING • This Service Manual is available in English only.

• If a customer's service provider requires a language other than English, it is the
(EN) customer's responsibility to provide translation services.
• Do not attempt to service the equipment unless this service manual has been
consulted and is understood.
• Failure to heed this warning may result in injury to the service provider,
operator, or patient, from electric shock or from mechanical or other hazards.
HOIATUS • Käesolev teenindusjuhend on saadaval ainult inglise keeles.

• Kui klienditeeninduse osutaja nõuab juhendit inglise keelest erinevas keeles,
(ET) vastutab klient tõlketeenuse osutamise eest.
• Ärge üritage seadmeid teenindada enne eelnevalt
käesoleva teenindusjuhendiga tutvumist ja sellest aru saamist.
• Käesoleva hoiatuse eiramine võib põhjustada teenuseosutaja, operaatori või
patsiendi vigastamist elektrilöögi, mehaanilise või muu ohu tagajärjel.
a
VAROITUS • Tämä huolto-ohje on saatavilla vain englanniksi.

• Jos asiakkaan huoltohenkilöstö vaatii muuta kuin englanninkielistä materiaalia,
(FI) tarvittavan käännöksen hankkiminen on asiakkaan vastuulla.
• Älä yritä korjata laitteistoa ennen kuin olet varmasti lukenut ja ymmärtänyt
tämän huolto-ohjeen.
• Mikäli tätä varoitusta ei noudateta, seurauksena voi olla huoltohenkilöstön,
laitteiston käyttäjän tai potilaan vahingoittuminen sähköiskun, mekaanisen
vian tai muun vaaratilanteen vuoksi.
ATTENTION • Ce manuel de service n'est disponible qu'en anglais.

• Si le technicien du client a besoin de ce manuel dans une autre langue que
(FR) l'anglais, c'est au client qu'il incombe de le faire traduire.
• Ne pas tenter d'intervenir sur les équipements tant que le manuel service n'a
pas été consulté et compris
• Le non-respect de cet avertissement peut entraîner chez le technicien,
l'opérateur ou le patient des blessures dues à des dangers électriques,
mécaniques ou autres.
WARNUNG • Diese Serviceanleitung existiert nur in Englischer Sprache.

• Falls ein fremder Kundendienst eine andere Sprache benötigt, ist es aufgabe
(DE) des Kunden für eine Entsprechende Übersetzung zu sorgen.
• Versuchen Sie nicht diese Anlage zu warten,
ohne diese Serviceanleitung gelesen und verstanden zu haben.
• Wird diese Warnung nicht beachtet, so kann es zu Verletzungen des
Kundendiensttechnikers, des Bedieners oder des Patienten durch
stromschläge, Mechanische oder Sonstige gefahren kommen.
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ • Το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις διατίθεται στα αγγλικά μόνο.

• Εάν το άτομο παροχής σέρβις ενός πελάτη απαιτεί το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σε
(EL) γλώσσα εκτός των αγγλικών, αποτελεί ευθύνη του πελάτη να παρέχει
υπηρεσίες μετάφρασης.
• Μην επιχειρήσετε την εκτέλεση εργασιών σέρβις στον εξοπλισμό εκτός εαν
έχετε συμβουλευτεί και έχετε κατανοήσει το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις.
• Εαν δε λάβετε υπόψη την προειδοποίηση αυτή, ενδέχεται να προκληθεί
τραυματισμός στο άτομο παροχής σέρβις, στο χειριστή ή στον ασθενή από
ηλεκτροπληξία, μηχανικούς ή άλλους κινδύνους.
FIGYELMEZTETÉS • Ezen karbantartási kézikönyv kizárólag angol nyelven érhető el.

(HU) • Ha a vevő szolgáltatója angoltól eltérő nyelvre tart igényt, akkor a vevő
felelőssége a fordítás elkészíttetése.
• Ne próbálja elkezdeni használni a berendezést, amíg a karbantartási
kézikönyvben leírtakat nem értelmezték.
• Ezen figyelmeztetés figyelmen kívül hagyása a szolgáltató, működtető vagy a
beteg áramütés, mechanikai vagy egyéb veszélyhelyzet miatti sérülését
eredményezheti.
b
AÐVÖRUN • Þessi þjónustuhandbók er eingöngu fáanleg á ensku.

• Ef að þjónustuveitandi viðskiptamanns þarfnast annas tungumáls en ensku, er
(IS) það skylda viðskiptamanns að skaffa tungumálaþjónustu.
• Reynið ekki að afgreiða tækið nema að þessi þjónustuhandbók
hefur verið skoðuð og skilin.
• Brot á sinna þessari aðvörun getur leitt til meiðsla á þjónustuveitanda,
stjórnanda eða sjúklings frá raflosti, vélrænu eða öðrum áhættum.
AVVERTENZA • Il presente manuale di manutenzione è disponibile soltanto in inglese.

• Se un addetto alla manutenzione richiede il manuale in una lingua diversa, il
(IT) cliente è tenuto a provvedere direttamente alla traduzione.
• Si proceda alla manutenzione dell'apparecchiatura solo dopo aver consultato il
presente manuale ed averne compreso il contenuto
• Il non rispetto della presente avvertenza potrebbe far compiere operazioni da
cui derivino lesioni all'addetto, alla manutenzione, all'utilizzatore ed al paziente
per folgorazione elettrica, per urti meccanici od altri rischi.
警告 • このサービスマニュアルには英語版しかありません。
(JA) • サービスを担当される業者が英語以外の言語を要求される場合、翻訳作業は
その業者の責任で行うものとさせていただきます。
• このサービスマニュアルを熟読し理解せずに、装置のサービスを行わないで
ください。
• この警告に従わない場合、サービスを担当される方、操作員あるいは患者さ
んが、感電や機械的又はその他の危険により負傷する可能性があります。
경고 • 본 서비스 지침서는 영어로만 이용하실 수 있습니다 .

(KO) • 고객의 서비스 제공자가 영어 이외의 언어를 요구할 경우 , 번역 서비스를 제공
하는 것은 고객의 책임입니다 .
• 본 서비스 지침서를 참고했고 이해하지 않는 한은 해당 장비를 수리하려고 시
도하지 마십시오 .
• 이 경고에 유의하지 않으면 전기 쇼크 , 기계상의 혹은 다른 위험으로부터 서비
스 제공자 , 운영자 혹은 환자에게 위해를 가할 수 있습니다 .
BRDINJUMS • Šī apkalpes rokasgrāmata ir pieejama tikai angļu valodā.

• Ja klienta apkalpes sniedzējam nepieciešama informācija citā valodā, nevis
(LV) angļu, klienta pienākums ir nodrošināt tulkošanu.
• Neveiciet aprīkojuma apkalpi bez apkalpes rokasgrāmatas izlasīšanas un
saprašanas.
• Šī brīdinājuma neievērošana var radīt elektriskās strāvas trieciena, mehānisku
vai citu risku izraisītu traumu apkalpes sniedzējam, operatoram vai pacientam.
c
ĮSPĖJIMAS • Šis eksploatavimo vadovas yra prieinamas tik anglų kalba.

• Jei kliento paslaugų tiekėjas reikalauja vadovo kita kalba – ne anglų, numatyti
(LT) vertimo paslaugas yra kliento atsakomybė.
• Nemėginkite atlikti įrangos techninės priežiūros, nebent atsižvelgėte į šį
eksploatavimo vadovą ir jį supratote.
• Jei neatkreipsite dėmesio į šį perspėjimą, galimi sužalojimai dėl elektros šoko,
mechaninių ar kitų pavojų paslaugų tiekėjui, operatoriui ar pacientui.
ADVARSEL • Denne servicehåndboken finnes bare på engelsk.

• Hvis kundens serviceleverandør trenger et annet språk, er det kundens ansvar
(NO) å sørge for oversettelse.
• Ikke forsøk å reparere utstyret uten at denne servicehåndboken er lest og
forstått.
• Manglende hensyn til denne advarselen kan føre til at serviceleverandøren,
operatøren eller pasienten skades på grunn av elektrisk støt, mekaniske eller
andre farer.
OSTRZEŻENIE • Niniejszy podręcznik serwisowy dostępny jest jedynie w języku angielskim.

• Jeśli dostawca usług klienta wymaga języka innego niż angielski, zapewnienie
(PL) usługi tłumaczenia jest obowiązkiem klienta.
• Nie próbować serwisować wyposażenia bez zapoznania się i zrozumienia
niniejszego podręcznika serwisowego.
• Niezastosowanie się do tego ostrzeżenia może spowodować urazy dostawcy
usług, operatora lub pacjenta w wyniku porażenia elektrycznego, zagrożenia
mechanicznego bądź innego.
ATENÇÃO • Este manual de assistência técnica só se encontra disponível em inglês.

• Se qualquer outro serviço de assistência técnica, que não a gems, solicitar
(PT-BR) estes manuais noutro idioma, é da responsabilidade do cliente fornecer os
serviços de tradução.
• Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado ecompreendido este
manual de assistência técnica.
• O não cumprimento deste aviso pode por em perigo a segurança do técnico,
operador ou paciente devido a choques elétricos, mecânicos ou outros.
ATENÇÃO • Este manual de assistência técnica só se encontra disponível em inglês.

• Se qualquer outro serviço de assistência técnica, que não a gems, solicitar
(PT-PT) estes manuais noutro idioma, é da responsabilidade do cliente fornecer os
serviços de tradução.
• Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado ecompreendido este
manual de assistência técnica.
• O não cumprimento deste aviso pode colocar em perigo a segurança do
técnico, do operador ou do paciente devido a choques eléctricos, mecânicos
ou outros.
d
ATENŢIE • Acest manual de service este disponibil numai în limba engleză.

• Dacă un furnizor de servicii pentru clienţi necesită o altă limbă decât cea
(RO) engleză, este de datoria clientului să furnizeze o traducere.
• Nu încercaţi să reparaţi echipamentul decât ulterior consultării şi înţelegerii
acestui manual de service.
• Ignorarea acestui avertisment ar putea duce la rănirea depanatorului,
operatorului sau pacientului în urma pericolelor de electrocutare, mecanice sau
de altă natură.
ОСТОРОЖНО! • Данное руководство по обслуживанию предлагается только на английском

языке.
(RU) • Если сервисному персоналу клиента необходимо руководство не на
английском, а на каком-то другом языке, клиенту следует самостоятельно
обеспечить перевод.
• Перед обслуживанием оборудования обязательно обратитесь к данному
руководству и поймите изложенные в нем сведения.
• Несоблюдение требований данного предупреждения может привести к
тому, что специалист по обслуживанию, оператор или пациент получат
удар электрическим током, механическую травму или другое
повреждение.
UPOZORENJE • Ovo servisno uputstvo je dostupno samo na engleskom jeziku.

• Ako klijentov serviser zahteva neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan da obezbedi
(SR) prevodilacke usluge.
• Ne pokušavajte da opravite uredaj ako niste procitali i razumeli ovo servisno
uputstvo.
• Zanemarivanje ovog upozorenja može dovesti do povredivanja servisera,
rukovaoca ili pacijenta usled strujnog udara ili mehanickih i drugih opasnosti.
UPOZORNENIE • Tento návod na obsluhu je k dispozícii len v angličtine.

• Ak zákazníkov poskytovateľ služieb vyžaduje iný jazyk ako angličtinu,
(SK) poskytnutie prekladateľských služieb je zodpovednosťou zákazníka.
• Nepokúšajte sa o obsluhu zariadenia skôr, ako si neprečítate návod na obluhu
a neporozumiete mu.
• Zanedbanie tohto upozornenia môže vyústiť do zranenia poskytovateľa
služieb, obsluhujúcej osoby alebo pacienta elektrickým prúdom, do
mechanického alebo iného nebezpečenstva.
ATENCION • Este manual de servicio sólo existe en inglés.

• Si el encargado de mantenimiento de un cliente necesita un idioma que no sea
(ES) el inglés, el cliente deberá encargarse de la traducción del manual.
• No se deberá dar servicio técnico al equipo, sin haber consultado y
comprendido este manual de servicio.
• La no observancia del presente aviso puede dar lugar a que el proveedor de
servicios, el operador o el paciente sufran lesiones provocadas por causas
eléctricas, mecánicas o de otra naturaleza.
e
VARNING • Den här servicehandboken finns bara tillgänglig på engelska.

• Om en kunds servicetekniker har behov av ett annat språk än engelska
(SV) ansvarar kunden för att tillhandahålla översättningstjänster.
• Försök inte utföra service på utrustningen om du inte har läst och förstår den
här servicehandboken.
• Om du inte tar hänsyn till den här varningen kan det resultera i skador på
serviceteknikern, operatören eller patienten till följd av elektriska stötar,
mekaniska faror eller andra faror.
DIKKAT • Bu servis kilavuzunun sadece ingilizcesi mevcuttur.

• Eğer müşteri teknisyeni bu kilavuzu ingilizce dişinda bir başka lisandan talep
(TR) ederse, bunu tercüme ettirmek müşteriye düşer.
• Servis kilavuzunu okuyup anlamadan ekipmanlara müdahale etmeyiniz.
• Bu uyariya uyulmamasi, elektrik, mekanik veya diğer tehlikelerden dolayi
teknisyen, operatör veya hastanin yaralanmasina yol açabilir.
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕН • Това упътване за работа е налично само на английски език.

• Ако доставчикът на услугата на клиента изиска друг език, задължение на
ИЕ клиента е да осигури превод.
(BG) • Не използвайте оборудването, преди да сте се консултирали и разбрали
упътването за работа.
• Неспазването на това предупреждение може да доведе до нараняване на
доставчика на услугата, оператора или пациент в резултат на токов удар
или механична или друга опасност.
警告 • 本服務手冊僅提供英文版本。
(ZH-HK) • 倘若客戶的服務供應商需要英文以外之服務手冊，客戶有責任提供翻譯服務。
• 除非已參閱本服務手冊及明白其內容，否則切勿嘗試維修設備。
• 不遵從本警告或會令服務供應商、網絡供應商或病人受到觸電、機械性或其他
的危險。
警告 • 本維修手冊僅有英文版。
(ZH-TW) • 若客戶的維修廠商需要英文版以外的語言，應由客戶自行提供翻譯服務。
• 請勿試圖維修本設備，除非您已查閱並瞭解本維修手冊。
• 若未留意本警告，可能導致維修廠商、操作員或病患因觸電、機械或其他危險
而受傷。
UPOZORENJE • Ovaj servisni priručnik dostupan je na engleskom jeziku.

(HR) • Ako davatelj usluge klijenta treba neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan osigurati
prijevod.
• Ne pokušavajte servisirati opremu ako niste u potpunosti pročitali i razumjeli
ovaj servisni priručnik.
• Zanemarite li ovo upozorenje, može doći do ozljede davatelja usluge,
operatera ili pacijenta uslijed strujnog udara, mehaničkih ili drugih rizika.
f
OPOZORILO • Ta servisni priročnik je na voljo samo v angleškem jeziku.

(SL) • Če ponudnik storitve stranke potrebuje priročnik v drugem jeziku, mora
stranka zagotoviti prevod.
• Ne poskušajte servisirati opreme, če tega priročnika niste v celoti prebrali in
razumeli.
• Če tega opozorila ne upoštevate, se lahko zaradi električnega udara,
mehanskih ali drugih nevarnosti poškoduje ponudnik storitev, operater ali
bolnik.
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent write “Damage In Shipment” on ALL
copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a GE representative or hospital receiving
agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event,
within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company
will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period.
To file a report:
Fill out a report on http://egems.med.ge.com/edq/home.jsp
Contact the local service coordinator.
CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

All electrical Installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be
performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into the Power Distribution Unit shall be performed
by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall
be performed by qualified GE Medical personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are
highly sophisticated, and special engineering competence is required. In performing all electrical work on these products,
GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electrical work on these products will comply with the
requirements of the applicable electrical codes.
The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers, personnel of third-party
service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.
g
REV 16 5116374
IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

X-ray equipment if not properly used may cause injury. Accordingly, the instructions herein contained should be thoroughly
read and understood by everyone who will use the equipment before you attempt to place this equipment in operation. The
General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, will be glad to assist and cooperate in placing this equipment in use.
Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of protection against x-radiation other than the useful beam, no practical
design of equipment can provide complete protection. Nor can any practical design compel the operator to take adequate
precautions to prevent the possibility of any persons carelessly exposing themselves or others to radiation.
It is important that anyone having anything to do with x-radiation be properly trained and fully acquainted with the
recommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements as published in NCRP Reports
available from NCRP Publications, 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of the
International Commission on Radiation Protection, and take adequate steps to protect against injury.
The equipment is sold with the understanding that the General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, its agents, and
representatives have no responsibility for injury or damage which may result from improper use of the equipment.
Various protective materials and devices are available. It is urged that such materials or devices be used.
LITHIUM BATTERY CAUTIONARY STATEMENTS
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent
type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
OMISSIONS & ERRORS

Customers, please contact your GE Sales or Service representatives.
GE personnel, please use the GEMS CQA Process to report all omissions, errors, and defects in this publication.
h
REV 18 5116374
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Tab - Section Page REV 4 (Table) i to ii 9
Title page 18 LCT TABLE (2297024/2302759) 1-1 to 1-53 18

-
Title page rear blank
5 (DAS/Detector) i 6
(Warning and other DAS BOARD (MDAS) 1-1 to 1-13 1
a to h 16
important information)
DAS BOARD (GDAS) 2-1 to 2-19 8
(Revision Information) A to D 18
DETECTOR 3-1 to 3-4 1
1 (Introduction) 1 18
6 (X-ray Generator) i 1
2 (Operator Console) i to iii 17 X-RAY GENERATOR 1-1 to 1-10 13
BIG OC ASSY 1-1 to 1-24 11 AUXILIARY BOX 2-1 to 2-3 1
Small OC ASSY 2-1 to 2-20 11 X-RAY TUBE 3-1 to 3-8 13
HOST CPU ASSY (Big OC) 3-1 to 3-12 17 4-1 to 4-9
X-RAY GENERATOR
1
HOST CPU ASSY (Small OC) 4-1 to 4-9 17 COMPONENTS - I
SCSI TOWER ASSY 5-1 to 5-5 15 X-RAY GENERATOR 5-1 to 5-15

1
COMPONENTS - II
3 (Gantry) i to ii 14
X-RAY GENERATOR
INTRODUCTION 1-1 to 1-10 6 6-1 to 6-25 13
COMPONENTS - III
GANTRY STATIONARY - I 2-1 to 2-14 1 X-RAY GENERATOR
7-1 to 7-13 1
COMPONENTS - IV
GANTRY STATIONARY - II 3-1 to 3-18 10
7 (PDU) i 10
GANTRY STATIONARY - III 4-1 to 4-18 1
PDU2 (2298852 / 2298849) 1-1 to 1-22 10
GANTRY STATIONARY - IV 5-1 to 5-8 16
GANTRY ROTATIONAL - I 6-1 to 6-14 14 8 (Appendix)
1
Symbols and Classification A-1 to A-4
GANTRY ROTATIONAL - II 7-1 to 7-20 10
GANTRY ROTATIONAL - III 8-1 to 8-39 14
- Blank/Rear cover -
A
REV 18 5116374
REVISION HISTORY
REV Date Primary Reason for Change
18 06/15/11 Introduction Added introduction for HHS support central web site for FDA 2579 form download.
OC -
Gantray -
Table Updated cradle potentiometer resistance from 500±100Ω to 125±50Ω.
DAS/Detector -
X-ray Genera- -
tor
PDU -
17 10/27/10 OC Added Advantech PC replacement procedure. (Sec. 3, Sec. 4)
16 06/17/10 Warning Added Languagewarning for Slovenian.
Gantray Updated Gantry Tilt Potentiometer replacement procedure. (Sec. 5)
15 12/02/09 Warning Added three Languagewarnings for HongKong, Taiwan and Croatian.
OC Added note for SCSI Tower replacement.
14 07/03/09 Gantray Added Collimator Assy replacement procedure. (Sec. 6)
Deleted Gantry Balun Assy, it is only for RF Slip Ring. (Sec. 8)
B
REV 18 5116374
REVISION HISTORY
REV Date Primary Reason for Change
13 12/25/08 Warning Added new languages for PT-BR (Portuguese-Brazil) and SR (Serbian).
Renamed PT to PT-PT (Portuguese-Portugal).
OC Updated Important Note for SCSI Cable connection. (Sec. 3 & Sec. 4)
Updated resistance from 250Ω to 2.5KΩ for tilt potentiometer replacement. (Sec. 5)
Gantray
Added figure and torque for Aperture Assy. (Sec. 6)
Updated command and path for X-ray Generator replacement (JEDI error definition file and TnT def-
inition file) according to CR13219265. (Sec. 1)
X-ray Generator
Added Person required and updated special equipment for X-ray Tube replacement. (Sec. 3)
Updated command and path for KV Control Board replacement according to CR13219265. (Sec. 6)
12 05/09/08 OC Updated Host Computer replacement procedure. (Sec. 3 & Sec. 4)

Added Note for SCSI Cable connection of HP8400 according to PQR13171926. (Sec. 3 & Sec. 4)
11 11/06/07 OC Added new PS information for Big OC and Small OC. (Sec.1 & Sec. 2)
Added HP8400 upgrade for Big OC, HP8000 to HP8400 and HP8200 to HP8400. (Sec. 3)
Added HP8400 upgrade for Small OC, HP8200 to HP8400. (Sec. 4)
10 06/08/07 OC Updated error. (Sec. 3 & Sec. 4)
Updated error. (Sec. 3, Sec. 6 and Sec. 8)

Gantray
Updated Axial Drive Belt replacement process. (Sec. 7)
PDU Added circuit breaker replacement for PDU2 400V.
9 12/25/06 Table Added Cradle Potentiometer Pulley Metal Cable Replacement.
8 09/27/06 OC Added illustrations of OC Power Supplie (not include -12VDC_Option) and NPD for big OC and small
OC. (Sec.1, Sec. 2)
Updated Front Panel replacement process. (Sec. 2)
DAS/Detector Added Illustration of DAS DATA Output Signal Cable Connection Position. (Sec. 2)
7 05/16/06 OC Updated fan replacement and PS replacement. (Sec. 1)

Added Section 2 and Section 4 for Small OC.
Updated SCSi tower replacement. (Sec. 5)
6 03/06/06 OC Updated Host Computer replacement. (Sec. 2)
Updated error. (Sec. 1)

Gantray
Added GDAS Power Supply information. (Sec. 7)
DAS/Detector Added GDAS information. (Sec. 2)
5 08/22/05 OC Added HP xw8000 to HP xw8200 upgrade procedures (Sec. 2).
Gantray Updated installation of Gantry Cover (Sec. 1)
4 07/27/05 OC Add HPxw8200 Host CPU illustration 2-4 (Sec.2)
3 06/21/05 OC Changed the wrong illustration 3-1. (Sec. 3)
X-ray Generator Added Torque information to Illustration 3-5. (Sec. 3)
2 01/21/05 Gantray Added Setion 7-3-1of DCP2 ARM ROM Assy and DCP2 FPGA ROM Assy replacement. (Sec. 7)
1 10/15/04 Initial Release
C
D
REV 18 5116374
INTRODUCTION
The following components are CDRH certified. And the replacement must be reported:
Operator Console, Gantry, Table, PDU, X-Ray Tube and Collimator.
Download the FDA 2579 form from the HHS Support Central Web site and complete the form.
http://supportcentral.ge.com/products/sup_products.asp?prod_id=16442
1 INTRODUCTION
2 INTRODUCTION
REV 17 5116374
OPERATOR CONSOLE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 - BIG OC ASSY (HiSpeed Dual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 FRONT COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-2 SIDE COVERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-3 FRONT PANEL ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-4 OC POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-4-1 OC Power Supply (three units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-4-2 OC Power Supply (one unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-5 AC BOX ASSY CABLE KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-6 NPD ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-7 NAA1 ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1-8 SPEAKER ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1-9 REAR CN1 PANEL ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1-11 DASIFN PANEL ASSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1-12 VSPL ASSY (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1-13 FAN ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1-13-1 Rear Fan Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1-13-2 Fan Assy of Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1-14 MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1-15 MOUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
1-16 KEYBOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
SECTION 2 - SMALL OC ASSY (ProSpeed FII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2-1 CONSOLE COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-1-1 Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-1-2 Side Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-1-3 Rear Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-2 FRONT PANEL ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-3 OC POWER SUPPLIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-3-1 OC Power Supply (three units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-3-2 OC Power Supply (one unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-4 NPD ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-5 NAA1 ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-6 SPEAKER ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-9 DASIFN PANEL ASSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2-10 VSPL ASSY (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
i OC
REV 17 5116374
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
2-11 SMALL FAN ASSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2-12 REAR FAN ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2-13 MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2-14 MOUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2-15 KEYBOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
SECTION 3 - HOST ASSY (HiSpeed Dual, BIG OC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3-1 HOST ASSY (HP8000/8200/8400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-1-1 DBPCI ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-1-2 Multiport Serial Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3-1-3 Be2 Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3-2 HOST ASSY (ADVANTECH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3-2-1 SCSI Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3-2-2 DBPCI Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3-2-3 Multi-Port Serial Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3-2-4 CPU Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3-2-5 ATX Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3-2-6 DVD-RW Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3-2-7 SATA Disk Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3-3 UPGRADE KIT FOR HOST PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3-3-1 Upgrade HP XW8000 to HP XW8200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
SECTION 4 - HOST ASSY (PROSPEED FII, SMALL OC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4-1 HOST ASSY (HP8200/8400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-1-1 DBPCI ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-1-2 MULTIPORT SERIAL CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-1-3 BE2 WORKSTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4-2 HOST ASSY (ADVANTECH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-2-1 SCSI Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-2-2 DBPCI Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4-2-3 Multi-Port Serial Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-2-4 CPU Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4-2-5 ATX Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4-2-6 DVD-RW Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-2-7 SATA Disk Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4-3 Upgrade HP XW8200 to HP XW8400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
SECTION 5 - SCSI TOWER ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
ii OC
REV 11 5116374
SECTION 1 - BIG OC ASSY (HISPEED DUAL)
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZAD!
IF THE SYSTEM HAS UPS ASSY, MAKE SURE YOU TURN OFF THE UPS POWER BEFORE
YOU ACCESS THE OPERATOR CONSOLE.
NOTICE
For systems powered from a power distribution box which has a lockout capability, perform
the following steps at appropriate timings in each component replacement procedure:
.......
Turn off and lock out the system power at the main input (Power Distribution Box).
.......
Restore system power.
.......
1-1 OC
REV 11 5116374
1-1 FRONT COVER
Special Equipment
• Front Cover
Understand and follow the Safety Guidelines Manual.

1. From the service desktop, shut down the system.
2. Turn OFF console power.
3. Loosen two captive screws at bottom of console (Illustration 1-1).
4. Rotate bottom of cover outward and upward until it may be lifted free of the console at the top.
Illustration 1-1 Front Cover Removal

Loosen Two
Captive Screws
5. Install the new Front Cover by referring to steps 4. through 3.

6. END
1-2 OC
REV 11 5116374
1-2 SIDE COVERS
Special Equipment
• Side Covers

1. Loosen the two captive screws at the bottom of the side cover.
Illustration 1-2 Side Cover Removal
2. Rotate the bottom of the cover up and out.

3. Lift cover off of cover hangers (Illustration 1-3).
Illustration 1-3 Side Cover Hanger
4. Install the new Side Cover by referring to steps 3. to 1.

5. END
1-3 OC
REV 11 5116374
1-3 FRONT PANEL ASSY
Special Equipment
• Front Panel ASSY
• Tie Wraps
• Functional Check/Adjustment Manual (CD-ROM)

1. Turn OFF the OC main power.
2. Remove the OC Front Cover by referring to Section 1-1.
3. Disconnect the Service Key connector by loosening its two screws.
4. Disconnect the USB Cable connector by unscrewing its two screws
5. Unscrew the two screws and remove the Front Panel Assy Holder with care (see illustration 1-4).
Illustration 1-4 Front Side View of the Front Panel Assy Holder
Screw (x 2)
USB Cable Service Key
1-4 OC
REV 11 5116374
1-3 FRONT PANEL ASSY (CONTINUED)

6. Disconnect the two cable connectors from the Front Panel Assy (see illustration 1-5).
7. Unscrew the four screws on the rear of the Front Panel Assy and slide the Front Panel Assy out.
8. Install the new Front Panel Assy by referring to steps 6. to 4.
9. Restore the OC to original configuration.
10. END
Illustration 1-5 Rear Side View of the Front Panel Assy Holder
Disconnet
two cables
Screw (x 4)
1-5 OC
REV 11 5116374
1-4 OC POWER SUPPLY
Special Equipment
• Power Supply
1-4-1 OC Power Supply (three units)

2. Remove the OC Front Side Cover by loosening its two (2) screws.
3. Remove the Front Panel Assy by referring to Section 1-3.
Illustration 1-6 OC Power Supplies Removal
Support
Screw (x2) +12V Power
Supply
-12V Power
Supply
+5V Power
Supply
Support
Screw (x2)
Illustration 1-7 OC Power Supplies Removal (no -12VDC_Option)
Support
Screw (x2) +12V Power
Supply
+5V Power
Supply
Support
Screw (x2)
1-6 OC
REV 11 5116374
1-4 OC POWER SUPPLIES (CONTINUED)

4. For power supply unit (+12VDC, -12VDC):
a. Remove the plastic guard from the front of the power supply terminal.
b. Mark and remove all the wires connected at the power supplies terminal.
c. Remove one or more power supply unit (+12VDC, -12VDC) from the power supply holder by unscrewing its
screws at front side and bottom of the unit.
5. For power supply unit (+5VDC): (See Illustration 2-3)
c. Unscrew the four (4) support screws and slide the whole power supply holder out of the OC.
d. Remove the unit from the power supply holder by unscrewing its four (4) screws at the bottom of the Power
Supply Holder.
6. Attach the new power supply by reversing the previous steps.
7. Turn ON the OC main power.
8. Perform the following check according to Functional Check & Adjustment manual.
DC POWER SUPPLIES
9. Install the OC Front cover.
10. END
1-4-2 OC Power Supply (one unit)

2. Remove the OC Front Side Cover by loosening its two (2) screws.
Illustration 1-8 OC Power Supply Removal
+5V
+12V
-12V
Screw (x2)
1-7 OC
REV 11 5116374
4. Remove the plastic guard from the front of the power supply terminal.
5. Mark and remove all the wires connected at the power supplies terminal.
6. Remove the power supply unit assy from the power supply holder by unscrewing its two screws.
Illustration 1-9 Power Supply Unit Assy
PS Unit
PS Bracket
7. Remove the unit from the bracket by unscrewing its three screws.
DC POWER SUPPLIES
11. Restore the OC original configuration.
12. END.
1-8 OC
REV 11 5116374
1-5 AC BOX ASSY CABLE KIT
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD!
Special Equipment
• AC BOX ASSY CABLE KIT
• Tie Wraps

2. For system with UPS Assy: Turn OFF the UPS power.
3. Turn OFF the breaker in the Power Distribution Box (hospital supply).
6. Remove the Power Supply Holder by unscrewing four (4) support screws.
7. Disconnect the following cable connectors:
- All right side connector plugs
- Power Cable (on the rear side)
- GND cable (on the rear side)
Illustration 1-10 GND and Power Cable

Power Cable GND
1-9 OC
REV 11 5116374
1-5 AC BOX ASSY CABLE KIT (CONTINUED)

8. Disconnect the following cable connectors from Power Supply:
- 5V power input cable
9. Remove the Right Cover of AC Box by unscrewing its eight (8) screws and one GND screw.
Illustration 1-11 AC Box Assy
Disconnet these connectors
5V Input Cable
AC Box
10. Slide out the AC Box Assy Cable Kit from the AC Box.
11. Install the new AC Box Assy Cable Kit by referring to steps 10. through 4.
13. END
1-10 OC
REV 11 5116374
1-6 NPD ASSY
WARNING
Special Equipment
• NPD ASSY
• Tie Wraps

4. Remove the OC Front Side Cover by referring to Section 1-1.
5. Remove the front EMC Cover.
6. Disconnect the following wire and cable connectors from NPD Assy:
- (J15_option), J16, J17 wire connectors
- (J2_option), J4, J7, J10 cable connectors
7. Remove the NPD Assy by unscrewing its five (5) screws.
1-11 OC
REV 11 5116374
1-6 NPD ASSY (CONTINUED)
Illustration 1-12 NPD Assy
No -12VDC (J2)
8. Install the new NPD Assy by referring to steps 6. through 5.

9. Verify that wiring and cabling are correctly connected.
11. END
1-12 OC
REV 11 5116374
1-7 NAA1 ASSY
Special Equipment
• NAA1 ASSY
• Tie Wraps

2. Remove the OC front cover by referring to Section 1-1.
3. Disconnect the cable connectors CN1, CN2 and CN3.
Illustration 1-13 NAA1 Assy and Speaker Assy
Speaker
screw (x4)
NAA1 ASSY
screw (x4)
4. Remove the NAA1 Assy by unscrewing its four (4) screws.

5. Check the NAA1 jumper and switch configuration.
6. Install the new NAA1 Assy by referring to steps 5. through 3.
7. Perform the following check according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment.
AUDIO FUNCTION TEST
9. END
1-13 OC
REV 11 5116374
1-8 SPEAKER ASSY
Special Equipment
• Speaker ASSY
• Tie Wraps

3. Disconnect the cable connectors CN2 and CN3.
4. Remove the Speaker Assy by unscrewing its four (4) screws.
5. Install the new Speaker Assy by referring to steps 4. through 3.
AUDIO FUNCTION TEST
8. END
1-14 OC
REV 11 5116374
1-9 REAR CN1 PANEL ASSY
Special Equipment
• Rear CN1 Panel Assy
• Tie Wraps

2. Remove the OC Front Cover and Rear Cover.
3. Remove the front EMC Covers.
4. Disconnect the following cable connectors from the Rear CN1 Panel Assy:
- J1~J7, J9, J11~J12 cable connectors
- J13~J17 cable connectors (rear connectors)
5. Remove the two screws, and slide the Rear CN1 Panel Assy out of the Interface Panel assy.
6. Check the Rear CN1 Panel Assy jumper configuration, referring to Functional Check/Adjustment -> SWITCH/
JUMPER SETTING OF BOARDS/DEVICES.
Illustration 1-14 Interface Panel Assy Box
Rear CN2 Panel Assy
DASIFN2 Panel Assy
VSPL Panel Assy (Option)
Rear CN1 Panel Assy
1-15 OC
REV 11 5116374
1-9 REAR CN1 PANEL ASSY (CONTINUED)

7. Remove the Film Cover and Studs by unscrewing five (5) screws.
8. Close JP9 on the new Rear CN1 board.
9. Install the new Rear CN1 Panel Assy by referring to steps 7. through 4.
11. END
Illustration 1-15 Connector Panel Assy
Rear CN1 Panel Assy

DASIFN2 Panel Assy
Rear CN2 Panel Assy
Film Cover Film Cover
Screw (x 5) stud (x 5)
Socket
Screw (x 5) wrench
1-16 OC
REV 11 5116374
Special Equipment
• Tie Wraps

- J3 ∼ J6
- J9 ~ J12
5. Remove the two screws, and slide the Rear CN2 Panel Assy out of the Interface Panel Assy.
6. Remove the Film Cover and Studs by unscrewing five (5) screws (Illustration 1-14)
9. END
1-17 OC
REV 11 5116374
1-11 DASIFN PANEL ASSY
Special Equipment
• DASIFN ASSY
• Tie Wraps

4. Disconnect the following cable connectors from the DASIFN Panel Assy:
• Front panel: J1 (Power cable connector), J2, J9
• Rear panel:
GDAS: J3 (TX, RX)
MDAS: J3 (RX)
5. Remove the two screws, and slide the DASIFN Panel Assy out of the Connector Panel assy (Illustration 1-14).
6. Check the DASIFN Panel Assy switch configuration, refer to Functional Check/Adjustment Manual -> Switch/
Jumper Setting of Boards/Device.
7. Install the new DASIFN Panel Assy by referring to steps 6. through 4.
9. END
1-18 OC
REV 11 5116374
1-12 VSPL ASSY (OPTION)
Special Equipment
• VSPL ASSY
• Tie Wraps

4. Disconnect the following cable connectors from the VSPL Panel Assy:
- J1, J2, J3, J4 (Power Cable)
5. Remove the two screws, and slide the VSPL Panel Assy out of the Connector Panel assy (Illustration 1-14).
6. Remove the Film Cover and Studs by unscrewing five (5) screws (Illustration 1-15).
7. Install the new VSPL Panel Assy by referring to steps 6. through 4.
9. END
1-19 OC
REV 11 5116374
1-13 FAN ASSY

Note
After the Fan Assy replacement, confirm the air flow direction is right.
1-13-1 Rear Fan Assy
Special Equipment
• FAN ASSY
• Tie Wraps

3. Disconnect the Power Cable Plug of Fan Assy from the AC Box.
4. Remove the Fan Assy Panel (left or right) by unscrewing its three (3) screws (Illustration 1-16).
5. Remove the Fan Assy from the Fan Assy Panel by unscrewing its twelve (12) screws.
6. Install the new Fan Assy by referring to steps 5 through 3.
Illustration 1-16 Fan Assy
Rear View
Screw (x3)
FANs (x2)
1-20 OC
REV 11 5116374
1-13-1 Rear Fan Assy (Continued)
Illustration 1-17 Air Flow Direction

Right View
Fan Assy_Right
Air Flow
Note: Indicates air flow direction

8. END
1-13-2 Fan Assy of Power Supply
Special Equipment
• FAN ASSY
• Tie Wraps

3. Disconnect the Power Cable Plug of Fan Assy from the AC Box.
4. Remove the Fan Assy from the OC Chassis by unscrewing its eight (8) screws (Illustration 1-16).
Illustration 1-18 Fan Assy of Power Supply

Front V iew
Connector
Box
PS
AC
Host Processor
Box
Note: Indicates air flow direction

7. END
1-21 OC
REV 11 5116374
1-14 MONITOR
Special Equipment
• Monitor

2. Remove the OC Rear Cover by loosening its two (2) screws.
3. Disconnect the signal cable from the back of the Monitor, and connect the cables to new Monitor.
4. Disconnect the power cable from the AC Box and connect the power cable of new Monitor to the AC Box.
5. Perform the following adjustment and test according to the CD-ROM manual, Installation.
MONITOR SET-UP
MONITOR FUNCTION TEST
7. END
1-22 OC
REV 11 5116374
1-15 MOUSE
Special Equipment
• Mouse

3. Disconnect the cable connector (J7) from the HOST Computer Assy.
4. Install the new Mouse.
5. Verify that Mouse is operating normally.
7. END
1-23 OC
REV 11 5116374
1-16 KEYBOARD
Special Equipment
• Keyboard

2. Remove the OC Rear Cover by unscrewing its two (2) screws.
3. Disconnect the cable connector (J17) from the Rear CN1 Panel Assy.
4. Install the new Keyboard by referring to steps 3.
5. Perform Keyboard Function Test according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment.
7. END
1-24 OC
REV 11 5116374
SECTION 2 - SMALL OC ASSY (PROSPEED FII)
WARNING
NOTICE
.......
.......
.......
2-1 OC
REV 11 5116374
2-1 CONSOLE COVER
2-1-1 Front Cover

1. Loosen two captive screws at bottom of console (Illustration 2-1).
2. Rotate bottom of cover outward and upward until it can be lifted free of the console at the top.
Illustration 2-1 Front and Rear Cover
Remove
3. To reinstall, reverse the previous steps.

4. END
2-1-2 Side Cover

1. Remove six (6) screws.
2. Lift cover away, so that tabs disengage from bottom lip of opening.
4. END
2-1-3 Rear Cover

1. Remove two (2) screws from the Rear Cover.
2. Loosen two (2) captive screws.
3. Tilt cover backward, so top moves away from console.
4. Lift cover away, so that tabs disengage from bottom lip of opening.
6. END
2-2 OC
REV 11 5116374
2-2 FRONT PANEL ASSY
Special Equipment
• Front Panel ASSY

3. Unscrew the four (4) screws and remove the Front Panel Assy Holder with care (see illustration 2-2).
4. Disconnect the Cable connector from J1 on the rear side of Front Panel Assy.
Illustration 2-2 Front Panel Assy with Holder

Front Side Rear Side
J1
5. Unscrew the four screws on the rear of the Front Panel Assy and remove the Front Panel Assy.
6. Install the new Front Panel Assy by referring to steps 5. to 3.
8. END
2-3 OC
REV 11 5116374
2-3 OC POWER SUPPLIES
Special Equipment
• Power Supply
2-3-1 OC Power Supply (three units)

2. Remove the OC Front Cover and Right Side Cover.
3. Remove PS Front Cover by unscrewing six (6) screws.
Illustration 2-3 OC Power Supplies Removal
Separate Template
Screw (x6)
+12VDC
-12VDC 5VDC
2-4 OC
REV 11 5116374
2-3 OC POWER SUPPLIES (CONTINUED)
Illustration 2-4 OC Power Supplies Removal (no -12VDC_Option)
+12V Power
Supply
+5V Power
Supply
4. For power supply unit (+12VDC, -12VDC):

c. Remove one or more power supply unit (+12VDC, -12VDC) from the power supply holder by unscrewing its
screws at front side and bottom of the unit.
5. For power supply unit (+5VDC): (See Illustration 2-3 and 2-4)
c. Remove Separate Panel by unscrewing four (4) screws.
d. Unscrew the six (6) support screws and slide the whole power supply holder out of the OC.
e. Remove the unit from the power supply holder by unscrewing its four (4) screws at the bottom of the Power
Supply Holder.
DC POWER SUPPLIES
10. END
2-5 OC
REV 11 5116374
2-3-2 OC Power Supply (one unit)

2. Remove the OC Front Cover.
3. Remove PS Front Cover by unscrewing six (6) screws.
Illustration 2-5 OC Power Supply Removal
+5V
+12V
-12V
Screw (x2)
4. Remove the plastic guard from the front of the power supply terminal.
5. Mark and remove all the wires connected at the power supplies terminal.
6. Remove the power supply unit assy from the power supply holder by unscrewing its two screws.
2-6 OC
REV 11 5116374
Illustration 2-6 Power Supply Unit Assy
PS Unit
PS Bracket
7. Remove the unit from the bracket by unscrewing its three screws.
DC POWER SUPPLIES
11. Restore the OC original configuration.
12. END.
2-7 OC
REV 11 5116374
2-4 NPD ASSY
WARNING
Special Equipment
• NPD ASSY
• Tie Wraps

4. Remove the OC Right Side Cover by referring to Section 2-1.
5. Disconnect the following wire and cable connectors from NPD Assy:
- (J15_option), J16, J17 wire connectors
- (J2_option), J3, J4, J10, J11, J13, J14 cable connectors
6. Remove the NPD Assy by unscrewing its five (5) screws.
Illustration 2-7 NPD Assy

No -12VDC (J2)
7. Install the new NPD Assy by referring to steps 6. through 5.

8. Verify that wiring and cabling are correctly connected.
10. END
2-8 OC
REV 11 5116374
2-5 NAA1 ASSY
Special Equipment
• NAA1 ASSY
• Tie Wraps

2. Remove the OC left side cover by referring to Section 2-1.
3. Disconnect the cable connectors CN1, CN2 and CN3.
Illustration 2-8 NAA1 Assy and Speaker Assy
4. Remove the NAA1 Assy by unscrewing its four (4) screws.

5. Check the NAA1 jumper and switch configuration.
AUDIO FUNCTION TEST
9. END
2-9 OC
REV 11 5116374
2-6 SPEAKER ASSY
Special Equipment
• Speaker ASSY
• Tie Wraps

3. Disconnect the cable connectors CN2 and CN3.
4. Remove the Speaker Assy by unscrewing its four (4) screws.
5. Install the new Speaker Assy by referring to steps 4. through 3.
AUDIO FUNCTION TEST
8. END
2-10 OC
REV 11 5116374
Special Equipment
• Tie Wraps

2. Remove the OC Right Side Cover and Rear Cover.
- J1~J7, J9, J11~J12 cable connectors
- J13~J17 cable connectors (rear connectors)
4. Remove the two screws, and slide the Rear CN1 Panel Assy out of the Interface Panel assy.
5. Check the Rear CN1 Panel Assy jumper configuration, referring to Functional Check/Adjustment -> SWITCH/
JUMPER SETTING OF BOARDS/DEVICES.
Illustration 2-9 Interface Panel Assy Box
Rear CN2 Panel Assy
DASIFN Panel Assy
Rear CN1 Panel Assy
2-11 OC
REV 11 5116374
2-7 REAR CN1 PANEL ASSY (CONTINUED)

6. Remove the Film Cover and Studs by unscrewing five (5) screws.
7. Close JP9 on the new Rear CN1 board.
10. END
Illustration 2-10 Connector Panel Assy
Rear CN1 Panel Assy

DASIFN2 Panel Assy
Rear CN2 Panel Assy
Film Cover Film Cover
Screw (x 5) stud (x 5)
Socket
Screw (x 5) wrench
2-12 OC
REV 11 5116374
Special Equipment
• Tie Wraps

- J3 ∼ J6
- J9 ~ J12
4. Remove the two screws, and slide the Rear CN2 Panel Assy out of the Interface Panel Assy.
5. Remove the Film Cover and Studs by unscrewing five (5) screws (Illustration 2-9)
8. END
2-13 OC
REV 11 5116374
2-9 DASIFN PANEL ASSY
Special Equipment
• DASIFN ASSY
• Tie Wraps

3. Disconnect the following cable connectors from the DASIFN Panel Assy:
• Front panel: J1 (Power cable connector), J2, J9
• Rear panel:
GDAS: J3 (TX, RX)
MDAS: J3 (RX)
4. Remove the two screws, and slide the DASIFN Panel Assy out of the Connector Panel assy (Illustration 2-9).
5. Check the DASIFN Panel Assy switch configuration, refer to Functional Check/Adjustment Manual -> Switch/
Jumper Setting of Boards/Device.
6. Install the new DASIFN Panel Assy by referring to steps 6. through 4.
8. END
2-14 OC
REV 11 5116374
2-10 VSPL ASSY (OPTION)
Special Equipment
• VSPL ASSY
• Tie Wraps

3. Disconnect the following cable connectors from the VSPL Panel Assy:
- J1, J2, J3, J4 (Power Cable)
4. Remove the two screws, and slide the VSPL Panel Assy out of the Connector Panel assy (Illustration 2-9).
5. Remove the Film Cover and Studs by unscrewing five (5) screws (Illustration 2-10).
6. Install the new VSPL Panel Assy by referring to steps 6. through 4.
8. END
2-15 OC
REV 11 5116374
2-11 SMALL FAN ASSY

Note
Special Equipment
• SMALL FAN ASSY (One Small Fan Assy includes two fans)
• Tie Wraps

2. Remove the OC Rear Cover.
3. Disconnect the Power Cable Plug of Fan Assy.
4. Remove the Fan Assy by unscrewing its nuts (2 on each fan).
5. To install new Fan Assy, reverse the previous steps.
7. END
Illustration 2-11 SCSI Fan Assy

Cable Connector
Small Fan Assy
2-16 OC
REV 11 5116374
2-12 REAR FAN ASSY

Note
Special Equipment
• FAN ASSY
• Tie Wraps

2. Remove the OC Rear Cover.
3. Remove the Fan Assy Panel (upper or lower) by unscrewing its four (4) screws (Illustration 2-11).
4. Disconnect the Power Cable of Fan Assy.
5. Remove the Fan Assy from the Fan Assy Panel by unscrewing its four (4) screws.
8. END
Illustration 2-12 Rear Fan Assy
2-17 OC
REV 11 5116374
2-13 MONITOR
Special Equipment
• Monitor

3. Disconnect the signal cable from the back of the Monitor, and connect the cable to new Monitor.
4. Disconnect the power cable from the AC Box and connect the power cable of new Monitor to the AC Box.
5. Perform the following adjustment and test according to the CD-ROM manual, Installation.
MONITOR SET-UP
MONITOR FUNCTION TEST
7. END
2-18 OC
REV 11 5116374
2-14 MOUSE
Special Equipment
• Mouse

3. Disconnect the cable connector (J7) from Rear CN2 Board.
4. Install the new Mouse.
5. Verify that Mouse is operating normally.
7. END
2-19 OC
REV 11 5116374
2-15 KEYBOARD
Special Equipment
• Keyboard

2. Remove the OC Rear Cover by unscrewing its two (2) screws.
3. Disconnect the cable connector (J17) from the Rear CN1 Panel Assy.
4. Install the new Keyboard by referring to steps 3.
5. Perform Keyboard Function Test according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment.
7. END
2-20 OC
REV 17 5116374
SECTION 3 - HOST ASSY (HISPEED DUAL, BIG OC)
WARNING
NOTICE
.......
.......
.......
3-1 OC
REV 17 5116374
3-1 HOST ASSY (HP8000/8200/8400)
Special Equipment
• HOST ASSY

1. Saving Patient Images and System State Data by referring to Functional Check/Adjustment Manual ->Intro-
duction -> 3-4 Basic Operation.
2. Shut down system.
3. Power OFF the Operator Console front switch, when instructed to “Power Down”.
4. Remove the front and rear Operator Console covers.
5. Visually verify proper labeling of each cable and disconnect all HP Host Computer rear cables.
6. Slide the Host Assy out of the OC by unscrewing its four (4) front mounting screws.
7. Remove the Handles from the old Host Computer and install to the new Host Computer.
8. Slide in the new Host Computer into the OC and fasten its four (4) mounting screws.
Illustration 3-1 HOST ASSY (Big OC)
Host ASSY
Handles Screw (x4)
3-2 OC
REV 17 5116374
3-1 HOST ASSY (HP8000/8200/8400) (CONTINUED)

9. Reconnect all HP Host Computer rear cables.
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
For HP8400, the SCSI Cable must be connected with SCSI Card B on rear of the Host Com-
puter (See Illustration 3-16). If you connect the SCSI Cable with SCSI Card A, 5” MOD option
will not function, and LFC will be required to recover (after connection the SCSI Cable with
SCSI Card B).
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
10. Power ON the OC, check BIOS setting, refer to Advanced Diagnostics -> OC -> Linux Host Processor Trou-
bleshooting.
11. Load software, refer to CD-ROM, Functional Check/Adjustment -> System -> Software Loading.
13. END
3-3 OC
REV 17 5116374
3-1-1 DBPCI ASSY
Special Equipment
• DBPCI ASSY

2. Remove the OC front and rear Covers.
3. Disconnect all the cable connectors on the rear side of Host Assy and slide the Host Assy out of the OC.
4. Unlock the cover on the side of the old workstation if it is locked. The cover keys should be kept by the cus-
tomer.
5. Pull out on the latch to release the cover. Tilt the cover open, then lift it off (Illustration 3-2).
Illustration 3-2 Remove the Host Computer Cover
3-4 OC
REV 17 5116374
3-1-1 DBPCI ASSY (Continued)

6. Remove the slot fastener by pinching its two sides and lifting it up (Illustration 3-3).
Illustration 3-3 Remove Slot Fastener
Slot Fastener
7. Disconnect the DBPCI Cable Assy (Illustration 3-4).

8. Remove the DBPCI Assy by slipping it up.
Illustration 3-4 Host Computer Assy
Be2 Workstation(HP8000)
Slot Fastener
Multiport Serial Card DBPCI ASSY

DBPCI Cable ASSY
3-5 OC
REV 17 5116374
Slot Fastener
DBPCI Cable Assy

DBPCI ASSY
Multiport Serial Card
Multi-Port
Series Card
DBPCI Board Assy SCSI Card
9. Install the new DBPCI Assy by referring to steps 8. through 5.

10. Power ON OC.
11. Check functions by referring to Functional Check/Adjustment Manual, and perform test scan and verify that im-
ages are normal.
13. END
3-6 OC
REV 17 5116374
3-1-2 Multiport Serial Card
Special Equipment
• Multiport Serial Card

4. Open the Host Assy top side cover (Illustration 3-2).
5. Remove the Multiport Serial Card by slipping it up (Illustration 3-4).
6. Install the new Multiport Serial Card by referring to steps 5. through 3.
7. Power ON OC.
ages are normal.
10. END
3-7 OC
REV 17 5116374
3-1-3 Be2 Workstation
Special Equipment
• Be2 Workstation

4. Unlock the cover on the side of the old workstation if it is locked. The cover keys should be kept by the custom-
er.
5. Pull out on the latch to release the cover. Tilt the cover open, then lift it off. (Illustration 3-2).
6. Remove the DBPCI Card (x2) and Multiport Serial Card.
7. Install the DBPCI Card (x2) and Multiport Serial Card into the new Be2 Workstation.
8. Install the Host Assy in the OC.
9. Reconnect all the cables to the Host Assy.
10. Power ON OC.
11. Load software referring to Functional Check/Adjustment Manual -> System -> Software Loading.
12. Perform test scan and verify that images are normal.
14. END.
3-8 OC
REV 17 5116374
3-2 HOST ASSY (ADVANTECH)
Special Equipment
• HOST ASSY (5401495)
5. Visually verify proper labeling of each cable and disconnect all cable connectors from rear side of the Host As-
sy.
6. Slide the Host Computer out of the OC by unscrewing its four (4) screws.
Illustration 3-5 Advantech PC Removal
Screw (x4)
3-9 OC
REV 17 5116374
3-2 HOST ASSY (ADVANTECH) (CONTINUED)

7. Remove two Handles from the defective Host Computer and install them to the new Host Computer.
Illustration 3-6 Advantech PC Top and Bottom Handles
Top and Bottom Handles
8. Remove the top cover and the baffle-plate from the defective host computer.
9. Pull out the SCSI card, multi-port serial card and DBPCI cards from PCI slots of the defectiver host computer.
10. Remove the top cover and the baffle-plate from the new host computer.
11. Insert the SCSI card, multi-port serial card and DBPCI cards to the new host computer.
12. Install the baffle-plate and the top cover to the new host computer.
14. Reconnect all cables to the new Host Computer which were disconnected in step 5.
bleshooting.
16. Load software, refer to Functional Check/Adjustment -> System -> Software Loading.
18. End.
3-10 OC
REV 17 5116374
3-2-1 SCSI Card
Special Equipment
• SCSI Card

4. Visually verify proper labeling of each cable and disconnect all cable connectors from rear side of the Host
Computer.
6. Remove the Host Computer Top Cover by unscrewing its two screws.
Illustration 3-7 Remove the Host PC Top Cover

Screw (x2)
3-11 OC
REV 17 5116374
3-2-1 SCSI Card (Continued)

7. Remove the baffle-plate by unscrewing its two screws.
Illustration 3-8 Remove the Baffle-Plate
Baffle-Plate
Screw (x2)
8. Pull out the SCSI Assy from the PCI slot by unscrewing its screw.
Illustration 3-9 SCSI Card

DBPCI Card (x2)
SCSI Card
Multi-Port Serial Card
3-12 OC
REV 17 5116374

9. Install the new SCSI Assy by referring to Step 8 to Step 4.
10. Power ON OC.
11. Check system function, and perform test scan and verify that images are normal.
13. End.
3-13 OC
REV 17 5116374
3-2-2 DBPCI Card
Special Equipment
• DBPCI Card

Computer.
8. Pull out the DBPCI Assy from the PCI slot by unscrewing its screw.
9. Install the new DBPCI Assy by referring to Step 8 to Step 4.
10. Power ON OC.
13. End.
3-14 OC
REV 17 5116374
3-2-3 Multi-Port Serial Card
Special Equipment
• Multi-Port Serial Card

Computer.
8. Pull out the Multi-Port Serial Assy from the PCI slot by unscrewing its screw.
9. Install the new Multi-Port Serial Assy by referring to Step 8 to Step 4.
10. Power ON OC.
13. End.
3-15 OC
REV 17 5116374
3-2-4 CPU Fan
Special Equipment
• CPU Fan (5401495-33)

Computer.
8. Disconnect the CPU Fan Power Cable.
Illustration 3-10 CPU Fan Removal
Screw (x4)
CPU Fan Power Cable
9. Remove the defective CPU Fan by unscrewing its four screws.

10. Install the new CPU Fan and connect the Power Cable.
12. End.
3-16 OC
REV 17 5116374
3-2-5 ATX Power Supply
Special Equipment
• Power Supply (5401495-31)

Computer.
8. Disconnect the power cable connectors from the main board and peripheral Assy power cable.
Illustration 3-11 Disconnect Power Supply Cable Connectors
Peripheral Assy
(DVD-RW, SATA Disk Drive)
Main Board
3-17 OC
REV 17 5116374
3-2-5 ATX Power Supply (Continued)

9. Unscrew one screw that fixing power cables from the bottom of the Host Computer.
Illustration 3-12 Unscrew the Bottom Screw
10. Unscrew two screws from the inside of the Host Computer and four screws from the rear side of the Host Com-
puter.
Illustration 3-13 Unscrew screws
3-18 OC
REV 17 5116374

11. Remove the defective power supply and place the new one into the workstation.
12. Install the new power supply by referring to Step 10 to Step 8.
14. Check the host computer that works normally.
15. End.
3-19 OC
REV 17 5116374
3-2-6 DVD-RW Driver
Special Equipment
• DVD-RW Driver (5401495-32)

Computer.
8. Mark and disconnect the signal and power cables from the peripheral assy (includes DVD-RW and SATA Disk).
9. Remove the peripheral assy from the workstation by unscrewing its four screws.
Illustration 3-14 Remove the Peripheral Assy from Workstation

Screw (x4)
Peripheral Assy
3-20 OC
REV 17 5116374
3-2-6 DVD-RW Driver (Continued)

10. Remove the DVD-RW driver from the peripheral shelves by unscrewing its four screws.
Illustration 3-15 Remove DVD-RW Driver

Screw (x4)
11. Install the new DVD-RW driver by referring to Step 10 to Step 8.

13. Check the DVD-RW driver that works normally.
14. End.
3-21 OC
REV 17 5116374
3-2-7 SATA Disk Driver
Special Equipment
• SATA Disk Driver (5401495-30)

Computer.
9. Remove the peripheral assy from the workstation by unscrewing its four screws. (See Illustration 3-14)
10. Remove the SATA disk driver from the peripheral shelves by unscrewing its four screws.
11. Install the new SATA disk driver by referring to Step 10 to Step 8.
13. Check the SATA disk driver that works normally.
15. End.
3-22 OC
REV 17 5116374
3-3 UPGRADE KIT FOR HOST PC
3-3-1 Upgrade HP XW8000 to HP XW8200
Special Equipment
• HP xw8200 and Software Upgrade Kit for HP xw8000 (5149187)
• Tie-wraps

1. Remove Host Computer (HP xw8000) by referring to Section 3-1.
2. Disconnect Serial Card Cable from the J3 connector of Rear CN1 Board.
3. Install new Host Computer (HP xw8200).
4. Connect TGP Cable from Host Computer Serial Port (DB9 on rear panel) to Rear CN1, J3.
5. Bundle the disconnected part of Serial Card Cable.
6. Reconnect all Host Computer rear cables.
7. Check BIOS setting. Power ON the OC, press Meas Dist to reach BIOS set screen when the Pentium Logo
displayed on the screen.
Refer to Advanced Diagnostics -> OC -> HOST COMPUTER BIOS STANDARD SETTING.
8. Softeware installation:
Refer to CD-ROM, Functional Check/Adjustment -> System -> Software Loading to reinstall Software.
10. END
3-23 OC
REV 17 5116374
Special Equipment
• HP xw8400 Upgrade Kit (5306413)
• Tie-wraps
1. Save Patient Images and System State Data.
2. Record the Camera configuration information (for the system with camera only).
NOTICE
Please record camera configuration, because camera configuration of CTT4.5.1 system can
not be restored in CTT6.2.9 system during system state restore.
4. Remove the Front and Rear OC Covers.
5. Check if existing TGP Cable (2369338) between Host Computer Serial Port (DB9 on rear panel) and Rear CN1,
J3.
6. If yes, skip to Step 8.
7. If not, disconnect Serial Card Cable from the J3 connector of RearCN1 Board, and connect the TGP Cable to
the J3 connector of RearCN1 Board.
9. Disconnect the SCSI Cable (2400998-2) from the SCSI Tower and remove it.
10. Slide the Host Assy out of the OC by unscrewing its four (4) front mounting screws. (See Illustration 3-1)
13. Connect the new SCSI Cable (2324697-2) between the Host Computer (SCSI Card B) and the SCSI Tower.
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
The SCSI Cable must be connected with SCSI Card B on rear of the Host Computer (See Il-
lustration 3-16). If you connect the SCSI Cable with SCSI Card A, 5” MOD option will not
function, and LFC will be required to recover (after connection the SCSI Cable with SCSI
Card B).
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
14. Bundle the disconnected part of Serial Card Cable.
15. Connect all the Host Computer rear cables including TGP Cable (2369338). (See Illustration 3-16)
3-24 OC
REV 17 5116374
3-3-2 Upgrade HP XW8000 to HP XW8400 (Continued)
Illustration 3-16 Host Computer (HP xw8400)
Rear View
Power Cord Connector
Mouse (green)
Keyboard (purple)
Paralle (burgundy)
Serial Connector (teal)

Connect TGP Cable
USB(x5) Multi Serial Port

LAN (orange)
Graphics Adapter
Microphone (pink)
Audio Line-Out (lime)
Audio Line-In (blue)
B A
DBPCI II (J4 DASIFN, J9)
External SCSI Card B DBPCI II (J4 DASIFN, J2;

RearCN1, J1)
16. Power ON the OC, refer to Advanced Diagnostics -> OC -> Host Computer BIOS Standard Setting to
check and change BIOS setting.
17. Software installation:
Refer to Functional Check/Adjustment -> System -> Software Loading to reinstall software.
Note
- Options can not be restored after Host Computer changed, so all Options should be re-installed
through a new Option key or eOption.
- Camera function can not be restored after Host Computer changed, so it should be re-config.
18. Perform a test scan and verify that the image is normal.
19. Check that all customer functions are operable.
21. END.
3-25 OC
REV 17 5116374
Special Equipment
NOTICE
4. Remove the Front and Rear OC Covers.
7. Slide the Host Assy out of the OC by unscrewing its four (4) front mounting screws. (See Illustration 3-1)
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Card B).
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
11. Connect all the Host Computer rear cables. (See Illustration 3-16)
12. Power ON the OC, refer to Advanced Diagnostics -> OC -> Host Computer BIOS Standard Setting to
Note
16. END.
3-26 OC
REV 17 5116374
SECTION 4 - HOST ASSY (PROSPEED FII, SMALL OC)
WARNING
NOTICE
.......
.......
.......
4-1 OC
REV 17 5116374
4-1 HOST ASSY (HP8200/8400)
Special Equipment
• HOST ASSY

1. Saving Patient Images and System State Data by referring to Functional Check/Adjustment Manual -> Intro-
duction -> Basic Operation.
5. Remove the front, rear and left covers of the Operator Console.
6. Remove the HP Press Bracket by unscrewing two (2) screws.
9. Replace the HP Top Bracket and HP Bottom Bracket from the old Host Assy to the new Host Assy.
Illustration 4-1 Host Assy for Small OC
Left Side Front Side
HP Press Bracket
screw (x4)
4-2 OC
REV 17 5116374
4-1 HOST ASSY (HP8200/8400) (CONTINUED)

10. Slide in the new Host Computer into the OC and fasten its four (4) front mounting screws.
11. Reconnect all the Host Computer rear cables.
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
For HP8400, the SCSI Cable must be connected with SCSI Card B on rear of the Host Com-
puter (See Illustration 4-16). If you connect the SCSI Cable with SCSI Card A, 5” MOD option
will not function, and LFC will be required to recover (after connection the SCSI Cable with
SCSI Card B).
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
12. Power ON the OC, check BIOS setting, refer to Advanced Diagnostics -> OC -> Linux Host Processor
Troubleshooting.
13. Load software, refer to CD-ROM, Functional Check/Adjustment -> System -> Software Loading.
15. END
4-3 OC
REV 17 5116374
4-1-1 DBPCI ASSY
Special Equipment
• DBPCI ASSY

2. Remove the OC Left Side Cover.
3. Unlock the cover on the side of the Host Computer if it is locked. The cover keys should be kept by the cus-
tomer.
Illustration 4-2 Open the Host Computer
4-4 OC
REV 17 5116374

5. Remove the slot fastener by pinching its two sides and lifting it up (Illustration 4-3).
Illustration 4-3 Remove Slot Fastener
Slot Fastener
6. Disconnect the DBPCI Cable Assy (Illustration 4-4).

7. Remove the DBPCI Assy by slipping it up.
Illustration 4-4 Host Computer Assy

Be2 Workstation(HP8200) Be2 Workstation(HP8400)
Slot Fastener
Multi-Port
Series Card
DBPCI Cable Assy

DBPCI ASSY DBPCI Board Assy SCSI Card
Multiport Serial Card
8. Install the new DBPCI Assy by referring to steps 7. through 5.
9. Power ON OC.
ages are normal.
12. END
4-5 OC
REV 17 5116374
4-1-2 MULTIPORT SERIAL CARD
Special Equipment
• Multiport Serial Card

2. Remove the OC Left Side Cover.
3. Unlock the cover on the side of the Host Computer if it is locked. The cover keys should be kept by the cus-
tomer.
5. Remove the Multiport Serial Card by slipping it up (Illustration 4-4).
6. Install the new Multiport Serial Card by reversing the previous steps.
7. Power ON OC.
ages are normal.
9. Restore the OC to original.
10. END
4-6 OC
REV 17 5116374
4-1-3 BE2 WORKSTATION
Special Equipment
• Be2 Workstation

1. Remove Host Assy from the Operator Console by referring to 4-1.
2. Remove the DBPCI Cable, DBPCI ASSY (x2), Multiport Serial Card by referring to Section 4-2.
3. Install the DBPCI Cable, DBPCI ASSY (x2), Multiport Serial Card into the new Be2 Workstation.
4. Replace the HP Top Bracket and HP Bottom Bracket from the old Host Assy to the new Host Assy.
5. Install the new Host Assy into the OC.
6. Reconnect all HP Host Computer rear cables.
7. Power ON OC.
8. Load software referring to Functional Check/Adjustment Manual -> System -> Software Loading.
9. Perform test scan and verify that images are normal.
10. Restore the OC to original.
11. END
4-7 OC
REV 17 5116374
4-2 HOST ASSY (ADVANTECH)
Special Equipment
• HOST ASSY (5401495)
5. Remove the front and left Operator Console covers.
6. Visually verify proper labeling of each cable and disconnect all cable connectors from rear side of the Host As-
sy.
7. Remove two PC press brackets shown as below illustration by unscrewing their screws.
Illustration 4-5 Press Brackets Removal
5148144-2
Screw (x2)
5148140-2
Screw (x4)
4-8 OC
REV 17 5116374

8. Slide the Host Computer Assy out of the OC by unscrewing its four (4) screws.
Illustration 4-6 Host Assy Removal
Screw (x4)
9. Remove the top/bottom handle brackets and bottom plate from the defective Host Computer.
Illustration 4-7 Brackets and Plate Removal
Top Handle Bracket

(5148139-2 & 5397885)
Bottom Plate Bottom Handle Bracket

(5397884) (5148138-2)
4-9 OC
REV 17 5116374

10. Open the host computer top cover by unscrewing its two screws.
12. Pull out the SCSI card, multi-port serial card and DBPCI cards from the PCI slots by unscrewing their screws.
13. Open the new host computer top cover and remove the baffle-plate.
14. Insert the SCSI card, multi-port serial card and DBPCI cards to the new host computer.
15. Restore the host computer and install the top/bottom handle brackets and bottom plate to the new host com-
puter. (See Illustration 4-7)
Note
Avoid 5148139-2 and 5397885 to be installed incorrectly to impact the host computer top cover in-
stallation.
16. Install the new Host Computer Assy by referring to Step 8 to Step 6.
bleshooting.
20. End.
4-10 OC
REV 17 5116374
4-2-1 SCSI Card
Special Equipment
• SCSI Card

3. Remove the left Operator Console cover.
4. Remove two PC press brackets by unscrewing their screws. (See Illustration 4-5)
5. Remove the host computer cover by unscrewing its two screw.
Illustration 4-8 Remove the Baffle-Plate
Screw (x2)
Baffle-Plate
4-11 OC
REV 17 5116374

7. Pull out the SCSI Assy from the PCI slot by unscrewing its screw.
Illustration 4-9 SCSI Card

DBPCI Card (x2)
SCSI Card
Multi-Port Serial Card
8. Install the new SCSI Assy by referring to Step 7 to Step 4.

9. Power ON OC.
12. End.
4-12 OC
REV 17 5116374
4-2-2 DBPCI Card
Special Equipment
• DBPCI Card

6. Remove the baffle-plate by unscrewing its two screws. (See Illustration 4-8)
7. Pull out the DBPCI Assy from the PCI slot by unscrewing its screw.
8. Install the new DBPCI Assy by referring to Step 7 to Step 4.
9. Power ON OC.
12. End.
4-13 OC
REV 17 5116374
4-2-3 Multi-Port Serial Card
Special Equipment
• Multi-Port Serial Card

6. Remove the baffle-plate by unscrewing its two screws. (See Illustration 4-8)
7. Pull out the Multi-Port Serial Assy from the PCI slot by unscrewing its screw.
8. Install the new Multi-Port Serial Assy by referring to Step 7 to Step 4.
9. Power ON OC.
12. End.
4-14 OC
REV 17 5116374
4-2-4 CPU Fan
Special Equipment
• CPU Fan (5401495-33)

Computer.
9. Disconnect the CPU Fan Power Cable.
Illustration 4-10 CPU Fan Removal
Screw (x4)
CPU Fan Power Cable
10. Remove the defective CPU Fan by unscrewing its four screws.
11. Install the new CPU Fan and connect the Power Cable.
13. End.
4-15 OC
REV 17 5116374
4-2-5 ATX Power Supply
Special Equipment
• Power Supply (5401495-31)

Computer.
9. Disconnect the power cable connectors from the main board and peripheral Assy power cable.
Illustration 4-11 Disconnect Power Supply Cable Connectors
Peripheral Assy
Main Board
4-16 OC
REV 17 5116374

10. Unscrew one screw that fixing power cables from the bottom of the Host Computer.
Illustration 4-12 Unscrew the Bottom Screw
11. Unscrew two screws from the inside of the Host Computer and four screws from the rear side of the Host Com-
puter.
Illustration 4-13 Unscrew screws
4-17 OC
REV 17 5116374

12. Remove the defective power supply and place the new one into the workstation.
13. Install the new power supply by referring to Step 11 to Step 9.
15. Check the host computer that works normally.
16. End.
4-18 OC
REV 17 5116374
4-2-6 DVD-RW Driver
Special Equipment
• DVD-RW Driver (5401495-32)

Computer.
10. Remove the peripheral assy from the workstation by unscrewing its four screws.
Illustration 4-14 Remove the Peripheral Assy from Workstation

Screw (x4)
Peripheral Assy
4-19 OC
REV 17 5116374
4-2-6 DVD-RW Driver (Continued)

11. Remove the DVD-RW driver from the peripheral shelves by unscrewing its four screws.
Illustration 4-15 Remove DVD-RW Driver

Screw (x4)
12. Install the new DVD-RW driver by referring to Step 11 to Step 9.

14. Check the DVD-RW driver that works normally.
15. End.
4-20 OC
REV 17 5116374
4-2-7 SATA Disk Driver
Special Equipment
• SATA Disk Driver (5401495-30)

Computer.
10. Remove the peripheral assy from the workstation by unscrewing its four screws. (See Illustration 4-14)
11. Remove the SATA disk driver from the peripheral shelves by unscrewing its four screws.
12. Install the new SATA disk driver by referring to Step 11 to Step 9.
14. Check the SATA disk driver that works normally.
16. End.
4-21 OC
REV 17 5116374
4-3 UPGRADE HP XW8200 TO HP XW8400
Special Equipment
NOTICE
5. Remove the front, rear and left covers of the Operator Console.
6. Remove the HP Press Bracket by unscrewing two (2) screws.
10. Replace the HP Top Bracket and HP Bottom Bracket from the old Host Assy to the new Host Assy. (See Illus-
tration 4-1)
11. Slide in the new Host Computer into the OC and fasten its four (4) front mounting screws.
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Card B).
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
4-22 OC
REV 17 5116374
4-3 UPGRADE HP XW8200 TO HP XW8400 (CONTINUED)

13. Reconnect all the Host Computer rear cables.
Illustration 4-16 Host Computer (HP xw8400)
Rear View
Power Cord Connector
Mouse (green)
Keyboard (purple)
Paralle (burgundy)
Serial Connector (teal)

Connect TGP Cable
USB(x5) Multi Serial Port

LAN (orange)
Graphics Adapter
Microphone (pink)
Audio Line-Out (lime)
Audio Line-In (blue)
B A
DBPCI II (J4 DASIFN, J9)
External SCSI Card B DBPCI II (J4 DASIFN, J2;

RearCN1, J1)
14. Power ON the OC, refer to Advanced Diagnostics -> OC -> Linux Host Processor Troubleshooting to
Note
17. Check that all customer functions are operable.
19. END.
4-23 OC
blank
4-24 OC
REV 15 5116374
SECTION 5 - SCSI TOWER ASSY
Special Equipment
• SCSI Tower Assy

1. If Applications are up, click on the [Shut Down] button.
3. Remove the SCSI cable, terminator and power cables.
4. Reinstall the replacement SCSI tower, cables and terminator.
Note
The switches on the rear of the SCSI tower are not used.
5. Turn ON the power to the Console and SCSI tower.
Check that the green power LED on the SCSI terminator is “ON”. If not check that the front SCSI tower switch
is “ON”, check that the terminator is seated and power cable is connected.
6. Read the customer option DVD, as a test of the DVD drive. The drive should operate without errors.
NOTICE
If option DVD read failed, please check the jumpter settings of the DVD-RAM Driver and
Adapter according to Functional Check/Adjustment Manual, SWITCH/JUMPTER SETTING
OF BOARDS/DEVICES, DVD-RAM Driver.
7. Restore system for customer operation.
8. End
5-1 OC
REV 15 5116374
Illustration 5-1 Rear View of SCSI Tower
Terminator
5-2 OC
REV 14 5116374
GANTRY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 - INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 SAFETY SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-2 REMOVAL / INSTALLATION OF GANTRY COVERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-2-1 Gantry Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-2-2 Gantry Rear Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-2-3 Gantry Side Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
SECTION 2 - GANTRY STATIONARY - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2-1 GNT DISP BOARD ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-2 FCV BOARD ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-3 RCV BOARD ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-4 SW BOARD ASSY (OF SW PANEL ASSY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-5 EMERGENCY SWITCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-6 X-DISP BOARD ASSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-7 GANTRY MICROPHONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-8 POSITIONING LIGHT WINDOW ASSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-9 LOOK GUIDE ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-10 GANTRY FAN ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2-11 REAR TSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
SECTION 3 - GANTRY STATIONARY - II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3-1 HSDCD RECEIVER ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-1-1 HSDCD Receiver Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-2 HSDCD ANTENNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-3 HSDCD BRUSH ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3-4 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE (RF RECEIVER - DASIFN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
SECTION 4 - GANTRY STATIONARY - III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4-1 POWER SUPPLY (PS1) / (PS2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-2 NAA2 ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-3 COVER SWITCH ASSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-4 SDS BOARD ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-5 SERVO AMPLIFIER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4-6 GANTRY MAIN BEARING GREASE-UP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4-7 SERVO MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-8 TGP BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-9 SUB BOARD ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4-10 GANTRY ROTATION COUNTER (2310012) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
i GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 5 - GANTRY STATIONARY - IV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5-1 TILT POTENTIOMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-2 HYDRAULIC CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
SECTION 6 - GANTRY ROTATIONAL - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6-1 COLLIMATOR FILTER ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-2 COLLIMATOR ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6-3 APERTURE ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6-4 APERTURE Z-AXIS BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6-5 APERTURE Z-AXIS MOTOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6-6 SCREW ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6-7 SENSOR ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6-8 APERTURE MOTOR DRIVER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
SECTION 7 - GANTRY ROTATIONAL - II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7-1 POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-1-1 Power Supply (MDAS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-1-2 Power Supply (GDAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7-2 OGP BOARD ASSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-3 DCP2 ASSY (MDAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7-3-1 DCP2 ARM ROM Assy and DCP2 FPGA ROM Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7-4 PHOTO SENSOR (GPLS1, GPLS2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7-5 AXIAL DRIVE BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7-6 HV CABLE (ANODE / CATHODE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
SECTION 8 - GANTRY ROTATIONAL - III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8-1 HSDCD TRANSMITTER ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8-2 SIGNAL INTERFACE BOARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8-3 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE (DCP - RF XMT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8-4 HSDCD SLIP RING ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
ii GANTRY
REV 6 5116374
SECTION 1 - INTRODUCTION
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
CAUTION
Possible injury! If the service angles fall over, they can injure persons. Therefore, after us-
ing the service angles, keep them in a safe place and/or secure them from falling over even
when the customer or other persons accidentally hit the service angles.
1-1 GANTRY
REV 6 5116374
1-1 SAFETY SWITCH

Note
If the Right Side cover is removed the safety switch is triggered and the Gantry can not rotate. To
allow the Gantry to rotate, attach the bracket as shown illustration below.
DANGER
DEATH OR SEVERE INJURY!
THE SAFETY SWITCH OF RIGHT MAINTENANCE COVER MUST NOT BE
ACTIVATED BY THE WAY OTHER THAN CLOSING THE RIGHT
MAINTENANCE COVER (E.G. BY ATTACHING A PIECE OF TAPE). ONCE
THIS SWITCH IS ACTIVATED, THE GANTRY MAY ROTATE AND POTENTIAL
DANGER IS PRESENT IF RIGHT MAINTENANCE COVER REMAINS OPENED.
Illustration 1-1 Safety Switches

Front Rear
1 Gantry Safety
Switch
1
Buzzer
Allen
Screw
Power
Supply
Gantry Safety Bracket Gantry Safety
Switch OFF Switch ON
1-2 GANTRY
REV 6 5116374
1-2 REMOVAL / INSTALLATION OF GANTRY COVERS
Special Equipment
• Cover Stand
1-2-1 Gantry Front Cover
Removal of Front Cover

1. Set the Gantry to the 0° position and lower the table to the lowest position.
2. Switch OFF the OC power and the “Rotate”, “XG Power”, “Safety Loop” and ”Table/Tilt” switches at the Gantry
rear base.
3. Remove the four rubber caps from each Side Cover.
4. Remove the four Side Cover mounting bolts.
5. Remove the Side Covers.
6. Remove the dust-proof.
7. Install the four service angle studs onto the Gantry Front Cover.
8. Install the two service angle to the Studs. See Illustration 1-2.
9. Remove the four Front Cover mounting bolts.
10. Slightly disengage the Gantry Front Cover and disconnect the Microphone and Gantry Operating SW
connection from the Gantry Front Cover.
Illustration 1-2 Attaching the Service Angles
STUDS
SERVICE
ANGLE
1-3 GANTRY
REV 6 5116374
1-2 REMOVAL / INSTALLATION OF GANTRY COVERS (CONTINUED)
1-2-1 Gantry Front Cover (continued)

11. Connect the Gantry Operating SW and the Display connector to the inner Gantry Service board. Refer to
illustration 1-3.
12. Hold the service angles, lift and move the Front Cover vertically as shown in illustration 1-4.
13. END
Illustration 1-3 Service Switch (front) Connection

SDS BD
FCV BD (on the CN1 Gantry Service
Gantry Cover) Board
Emergency
Switch
Front Gantry Cover
Illustration 1-4 Gantry Cover Removal
3 Vertical
2 Horizontal
1-4 GANTRY
REV 6 5116374
Installation of Front Cover
Special Equipment
• Glue 52# for Metal Ceramic attaching
• 30’ dry glue for Metal Ceramic attaching

2. Switch OFF the “Rotate”, “XG Power”, “Safety Loop” and ”Table/Tilt” switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Install the service angle onto the new Gantry Front Cover.
4. Attach the Gantry emblem and GE Logo which come with the Logo Kit to the location shown in Illustration 1-5.
5. To correctly attach the emblem.
a. Clean the surface on the Gantry.
b. Remove the backing paper of the emblem.
c. Carefully position the label (align the left and bottom sidelines of the label to the positioning tape, see Illus-
tration 1-5).
d. Rub adequately on the label surface so that the letters properly adhere to the Gantry surface.
1-5 GANTRY
REV 6 5116374

e. Remove carefully the front paper and positioning tape.
Illustration 1-5 Attach the Gantry Emblem
70mm
HiSpeed Dual
35mm
6. Install the new Gantry Front Cover (without Support (2238364)) to the Gantry temporarily, adjust it to proper
location.
7. Temporarily place the dust-proof based on the Gantry Rear Cover.
8. According to the distance between the dust-proof and the Gantry Front Cover, decide where to locate the Sup-
port on the Gantry Front Cover, avoid big gap between the Support and the dust-proof.
9. Estimate the location of the Support on the Gantry Front Cover, mark up with a pencil.
11. Clean surface of the Support and the Gantry Front Cover, adhere double-face pastern to the Support, then at-
tach it to the Gantry Front Cover according to the mark at Step 9.
Note
Seam of the Support locates in horizontal with positioning light.
1-6 GANTRY
REV 6 5116374

12. Mark with pencil along edge of the Support on the Gantry Front Cover.
Illustration 1-6 Mark sign on the Gantry Front Cover
Support
Positioning
Light
Seam
13. Properly adjust position of the Support.

14. Use glue 52# to attach the Ring Cover (2143353) to the seam of the Support.
Note
Smear the glue 52# on the Ring Cover only to the overlap area with the Support.
15. Remove the Gantry Front Cover.
16. Use the 30’ glue to fix the Support onto the Gantry Front Cover, then wait about 30 minutes until glue becomes
dry.
17. Perform step 12 through step 3 of Removal of Front Cover procedure in their reverse order.
18. END
Note
For Front Cover location adjustment, refer to Functional Check/Adjustment, INTRODUCTION, 3-2-
3 Gantry Cover Adjustment.
1-7 GANTRY
REV 6 5116374
1-2-2 Gantry Rear Cover
Removal of Rear Cover

1. Set the Gantry to the 0° position.
rear base.
3. Remove the four rubber caps from each Side Cover.
4. Remove the four Side Cover mounting bolts.
6. Install the service angle studs onto the Rear Cover, repeat steps 7 to 8 (Front Cover Removal).
7. Remove the six Rear Cover mounting bolts.
8. Slightly disengage the rear cover and disconnect the Gantry control panel cables from the following connectors
of the RCV BD Assy of the rear cover.
• CN1
• CN9
9. Connect the Gantry control panel cables to the dummy connector of the inner gantry display board. Refer to
illustration 1-7.
10. END
Illustration 1-7 Service Switch (rear) Connection
RCV BD
Dummy Connector
CN1
Gantry Rear Cover
1-8 GANTRY
REV 6 5116374
Installation of Rear Cover
Special Equipment
• Glue 52# for Metal Ceramic attaching
• 30’ dry glue for Metal Ceramic attaching

3. Perform step 9 through step 3 of Removal of Rear Cover procedure in their reverse order.
4. END
Note
For the installation of the Gantry Support, refer to Installation of Front Cover.
Note
For Rear Cover location adjustment, refer to Functional Check/Adjustment, INTRODUCTION, 3-2-
3 Gantry Cover Adjustment.
1-9 GANTRY
REV 6 5116374
1-2-3 Gantry Side Cover
Removal of Side Covers

rear base.
3. Remove the two screw caps and mounting bolts, then move the cover forward or rearward to remove the cover.
4. Remove the right (or left) side cover.
5. END
Illustration 1-8 Side Covers Removal
Right Side Cover
Installation of Side Covers

3. Perform step 4 through step 3 of Removal of Side Cover procedure in their reverse order.
4. END
NOTICE
If the gap between the Side Cover and the Rear Cover is too big, adjust Side Cover vertically
to reduce this gap, refer to Functional Check/Adjustment, INTRODUCTION, 3-2-3 Gantry
Cover Adjustment.
1-10 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
SECTION 2 - GANTRY STATIONARY - I
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
2-1 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
2-1 GNT DISP BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• GNT Disp Board Assy
1. Set the Gantry to the 0° position and lower the Table to its lowest position.
2. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’ and ’Table/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove the Gantry front cover.
4. Disconnect the cable connector (SW Bd CN1, SW Bd CN2 and GNT Disp Bd CN1) from the Switch Board Assy.
(Illustration 2-2).
5. Hold the Switch Panel Assy and remove it by unscrewing its nine screws.
6. Remove the GNT Disp Board Assy from the Switch Panel Assy by unscrewing its ten (10) screws.
7. Install the new GNT Disp Board Assy by referring to steps 6. through 4.
8. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.
9. END
2-2 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
2-2 FCV BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• FCV Board Assy
4. Disconnect the cable connector (CN1, CN2, CN3, CN4, CN5, CN6, CN7 and CN8) from the DISP Board Assy.
(CN5: Breath Navi Option, CN6: Touch Sensor Option)
5. Remove the FCV Board Assy from the Gantry front cover by unscrewing its seven screws.
6. Install the new FCV Board Assy by referring to steps 5. through 4.
7. Retie any tie wraps which were removed in step 4.
9. END
Illustration 2-1 FCV Board Assy Removal
Gantry Front Cover
FCV Board Assy
Screw
2-3 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
2-3 RCV BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• RCV Board Assy
3. Remove the Gantry rear cover.
4. Perform the similar way as for FCV BD Assy.
a. Disconnect the cable connector (CN1, CN3 ~ CN10) from the DISP Board Assy.
(CN3, CN4 and CN10: Rear SW Option, CN5: Breath Navi Option, CN6: Prescribed Tilt Option)
b. Remove the RCV Board Assy from the Gantry rear cover by unscrewing its seven screws.
c. Install the new RCV Board Assy by referring to steps b. through a.
6. END
2-4 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
2-4 SW BOARD ASSY (OF SW PANEL ASSY)
Special Equipment
• Switch Board Assy
4. Disconnect the cable connector (SW Bd CN1, SW Bd CN2 and GNT Disp Bd CN1) from the Switch Board Assy.
(Illustration 2-2).
5. Hold the Switch Panel Assy and remove it by unscrewing its nine screws.
6. Remove the Switch Board Assy from the Switch Panel Assy by unscrewing its eleven (11) screws.
7. Install the new Switch Board Assy by referring to steps 6. through 4.
9. END
Illustration 2-2 SW Board Assy and GNT Disp Board Assy
SW Panel Assy
Screws (x10) GNT Disp Board Assy

Screws (x9) SW Bd CN2 DISP Bd CN1
SW Board Assy
Screws (x11)
SW Bd CN1
Gantry Cover
2-5 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
2-5 EMERGENCY SWITCH
Special Equipment
• Emergency Switch Assy
2. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’and ’Table/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove the Gantry Front Cover.
4. Mark and remove the wires from the Emergency Switch.
5. Remove the Emergency Switch with support plate from the ESW base by unscrewing its four (4) nuts.
6. Unscrew the ring nut, and remove the Emergency Switch from the support plate.
7. Install the new Emergency Switch by referring to steps 6. through 4.
9. END
Illustration 2-3 Gantry Emergency Switch Removal
Gantry Cover
Ring/Nut
ESW Base
and Rubber Switch
Support Plate
Nut
2-6 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
2-6 X-DISP BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• X-Disp Board Assy
3. Remove the Gantry Rear cover.
4. Disconnect the cable connector from the X-Disp Board Assy.
5. Remove the X-Disp Board Assy from the IND Support Bracket by unscrewing its four screws.
6. Install the new X-Disp Board Assy by referring to steps 5. through 4.
8. END
2-7 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
2-7 GANTRY MICROPHONE
Special Equipment
• Microphone
3. Remove the Gantry Front (or/and Rear) cover.
4. Disconnect the cable connector from the microphone assy.
5. Remove the microphone assy by pulling the device straight out from the Look Guide assy.
6. Install the new microphone assy by referring to steps 5. through 4.
8. END
Illustration 2-4 Gantry Microphone Removal
Gantry Rear Cover

Gantry Front Cover
Look Guide (Rear)
Look Guide
Connector (Front)
Microphone Assy
Look Guide Assy
2-8 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
2-8 POSITIONING LIGHT WINDOW ASSY
Special Equipment
• Positioning Light Window Assy
4. Remove the Positioning Light Window assy by unscrewing its four screws.
5. Install the new Positioning Light Window assy.
7. END
Illustration 2-5 Positioning Light Window Assy Removal
Gantry Front Cover
Positioning Light
Window Assy
Screws (x4)
2-9 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
2-9 LOOK GUIDE ASSY
Special Equipment
• Look Guide Assy (Front / Rear)
FRU Primary Component

Microphone Look Guide BD1 Look Guide BD2
Positioning Light Window Assy - - -
Front/Rear Look Guide 2 ) - -
Front/Rear Look Guide 1 ) ) )
3. Remove and replace the Look Guide Assy (Front) as follows:
a. Remove the Gantry both side cover and front cover.
b. Disconnect the cable connectors (CN1 on the FBN Board and microphone) from the Look Guide Assy.
c. Remove the Look Guide Assy (Front) by unscrewing its four screws.
d. Install the new Look Guide Assy by referring to steps c. through b.
Illustration 2-6 Look Guide Assy (Front) Removal
Gantry Front Cover Screws (x4)

Microphone
FBN Board
Positioning Light
Window Assy
2-10 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
2-9 LOOK GUIDE ASSY (CONTINUED)

4. Remove and replace the Look Guide Assy (Rear) as follows:
a. Remove the Gantry rear cover.
b. Disconnect the cable connectors (CN1 on the RBN Board) from the Look Guide Assy.
c. Remove the Cable Support by unscrewing its two screws.
d. Remove the Look Guide Assy (Rear) by unscrewing its four screws.
e. Install the new Look Guide Assy by referring to steps d. through b.
6. END
Illustration 2-7 Look Guide Assy (Rear) Removal
Screws (x2)
Gantry Rear Cover
Cable Support
Look Guide Assy (Rear)
RBN Board
Screws (x4)
2-11 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
2-10 GANTRY FAN ASSY
Special Equipment
• Gantry FAN Assy
• Tie wraps
1. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’ and ’Table/Tilt’ and ’Slip Ring115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
2. Remove the both side and front covers from the Gantry.
3. Rotate the Gantry until the AUX. box reaches the 12 o’clock position.
4. Remove the two front holding screws from the Gantry front frame (see illustration 2-8).
5. Disconnect the power cable connector from the Fan assy (see illustration 2-8).
6. Install the new Gantry Fan assy by referring to steps 5. through 4.
7. Switch ON the ‘Table/Tilt’. Verify that the Fan is operating normally.
9. END
Illustration 2-8 Gantry Fan Assy Removal
Gantry Top Cover
Power Cable Connector
Gantry Front Frame
Gantry Fan Front

Assy Holding
Screws
2-12 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
2-11 REAR TSW
1. Set the Gantry to the 0° tilt position and lower the Table to its lowest position.
2. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’, ‘Table/Tilt’, and ‘Slip Ring 115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove right and left side covers.
4. Install the Cover Stands on each side of Gantry and check that they are fixed secure.
5. Remove the rear cover from the Gantry
6. Mark and disconnect the Rear TSW connectors (x3) from the Gantry. (Illustration 2-9).
Illustration 2-9 Rear TSW connectors
RCV
Board
Connectors (x3)
2-13 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
2-11 REAR TSW (CONTINUED)

7. Remove the nuts and washers (x6) as shown in the Illustration 2-10.
Illustration 2-10 Nut and washer
Nut (x6)
Washer (x6)
Cables
8. Remove the Rear TSW from the Gantry cover.

9. Install and connect the new Rear TSW by following the steps above in reverse order.
10. Adjust the Rear TSW Assy position and fasten all nuts.
Note
The clearance between the Rear TSW edges and the Gantry cover should be minimum.
Note
Fasten the cables in excess to the Gantry rear cover with tie-wraps.
Make sure that the cables and connectors are fixed secure.
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Certify that the Rear TSW is horizontally, vertically and center aligned.
Adjust the Rear TSW so that there is no clearance between its edge and the cover.
----------------------------------------------------------------------

a. Reinstall the rear cover.
b. Remove the cover stands.
12. END
2-14 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
SECTION 3 - GANTRY STATIONARY - II
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
3-1 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
3-1 HSDCD RECEIVER ASSY
3-1-1 HSDCD Receiver Replacement
NOTICE
Before touching any of the components, attach the wrist strap to your wrist and to the metal
part of the chassis.
Special Equipment
• HSDCD Receiver
2. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’ and ’Slip Ring 115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove the Gantry both side and the rear cover.
4. Remove the HSDCD Receiver Cover by unscrewing its 4 screws.
5. Disconnect the RF cables from the HSDCD Receiver.
6. Remove the HSDCD Receiver by unscrewing its two screws. (Illustration 3-1).
NOTICE
Do not loosen any other screws from HSDCD Receiver assy than mentioned in the step 6. If
loosened other screws, the Receiver position must be readjusted.
Illustration 3-1 HSDCD Receiver replacement
HSDCD Receiver
RF Cables
Screw (x2)
3-2 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
3-1 HSDCD RECEIVER ASSY (CONTINUED)

7. Replace the new HSDCD Receiver.
8. Reconnect the RF cables to the HSDCD Receiver.
9. Switch ON the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
10. Rotate the Gantry manually to perform the following checks:
Check to make sure that the HSDCD Antenna does not touch the Slip Ring during its revolution.
Check to make sure that the cables does not catch on any stationary components during each revolution.
Check if the movement is smooth and there is no abnormal noise. Make more than one complete rotation.
11. Switch ON the ’Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
12. Switch OFF the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
13. Press Reset switch on the TGP Board.
14. Perform the Gantry rotation using TGP service switches and verify if the movement is smooth.
15. Install the rear, right side, and left maintenance covers.
17. Switch ON the ’XG Power’ and ’Slip Ring 115V’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
18. Perform Data Transfer Check according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment, DAS/DE-
TECTOR.
19. END
3-3 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
3-2 HSDCD ANTENNA
Special Equipment
• HSDCD Antenna
Note
The probability of a HSDCD Receiver failure is greater than HSDCD Antenna failure. Before
replacing the HSDCD Antenna replace only HSDCD Receiver and proceed the functional check.
NOTICE
Before touching any of the components, attach the wrist strap to your wrist and to the metal
part of the chassis.
2. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’ and ’Slip Ring 115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove the Gantry both side and the rear cover.
4. Remove the HSDCD Receiver by unscrewing its four screws.
Illustration 3-2 HSDCD Antenna replacement

HSDCD Antenna
HSDCD Receiver
RF Cables
Screw (x2)
3-4 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
3-2 HSDCD ANTENNA (CONTINUED)

6. Remove the HSDCD Receiver Assy by unscrewing its two screws. (Illustration 3-3).
7. Remove the HSDCD Support 3, 4 from HSDCD Antenna.
8. Remove the HSDCD Support 1 by unscrewing its three screws and washers.
9. Install the new HSDCD Antenna.
10. Perform following adjustment and check according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment,
Gantry.
HSDCD RECEIVER ASSY POSITION
Illustration 3-3 HSDCD Receiver Assy
M6x12
Screws (x2)
HSDCD
Antenna
3-5 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
3-2 HSDCD ANTENNA (CONTINUED)

11. Reconnect the RF cables.
12. Attach the RF cable with tie-wrap.
13. Place the RF Cables close by HSDCD Antenna. (Illustration 3-4).
Illustration 3-4 RF cables and tie-wrap.
RF Cables close by
HSDCD Antenna
RF Cables
Screw (x2) tie-wrap
dispose the
cable
horizontally
16. Switch ON the ’Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
17. Switch OFF the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
18. Press Reset switch on the TGP Board.
21. Switch ON the ‘XG Power’ and ’Slip Ring115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
DAS/DETECTOR.
DATA TRANSFER CHECK
24. END
3-6 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
3-3 HSDCD BRUSH ASSY
Special Equipment
• Brush Assy
• Tie wraps
• Kim Wipe
CAUTION
When servicing the Slip Rings and Brushes, wait approximately five minutes after switching
OFF the CB1 in the PDU for all capacitors in the XG Unit to discharge.
CAUTION
Exercise caution when working with slip ring components to avoid contact, inhalation, and
ingestion of slip ring brush powder.
Gloves : Large size : 46-194427P400, X-Large size : 46-194427P401

HEPA Vacuum Cleaner : 46-297933P1 to remove brush block powder (dust).
Do not remove gloves near an exposed slip ring. The powder inside the glove can
contaminate the ring.
3-7 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
3-3 HSDCD BRUSH ASSY (CONTINUED)
NOTICE
The Brushes are very fragile. Handle the Brush Block with care.
For an eventual brush breakage, check the type and replace it provided in the
FieldEmergency Kit Assy.
1. Preparation:
a. Remove the PDU front cover by unscrewing its 2 screws.
b. Switch OFF the CB1 and CB5 breakers in the PDU.
c. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
d. Remove the Gantry rear cover.
3-8 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
3-3 BRUSH ASSY (CONTINUED)
BRUSH BLOCK REMOVAL

1. Remove the HSDCD Brush Block Assy from the Gantry as follows:
a. Disconnect the cable connector CN1 connected to the Signal Brush board.
b. Remove the Terminal cover from the HSDCD Brush Block Assy by unscrewing its 2 screws.
c. Mark and disconnect all power cables (including the GND cable) from the power bars.
d. Remove the HSDCD Brush Block assy by unscrewing its 2 border allen screws. (Illustration 3-5).
e. Replace the removed screws for Pin Jigs provided in the Service Tool kit.
f. Remove the remaining 2 middle allen screws.
NOTICE
Do not screw (or unscrew) the Adjustment Screws and Nuts. The Gantry design fixes the
Brush Block position.
Illustration 3-5 HSDCD Brush Block Assy removal
Power Cables
(M6:6N.m)
Terminal Cover
(M4:1.8N.m)
Power Cables
DO NOT
Screws (x2)
SCREW/
UNSCREW THE
ADJUSMENT
SCREWS AND
NUTS
Connector
Signal CN1
Middle Power
Screws (x2) Brushes
Signal
Brushes
DO NOT
SCREW/
UNSCREW THE
ADJUSMENT
SCREWS AND
NUTS Border Screws (x2)
3-9 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374

g. Remove the HSDCD Brush Block always keeping in the perpendicular direction with the Slip Ring to avoid
a brush breakage.
Illustration 3-6 HSDCD Brush Block Removal
MOVE THE BRUSH BLOCK IN

PERPENDICULAR DIRECTION
IN RELATION WITH SLIP RING
HSDCD
Slip Ring
Remove the Brush
Block with care
Slip Ring
Guide HSDCD Barrier Slip Ring
Pins Brush
Block
Brush Brush
Block
h. Remove the Guide Pins (x2).
NOTICE
Do not touch the slip ring surfaces. Also, do not touch the brush surfaces.
NOTICE
Do not polish the slip ring surfaces and the brush surfaces using an Abrasive (or
equivalent).
3-10 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
SIGNAL BRUSH REPLACEMENT
NOTICE
For an eventual brush breakage, check the type and replace it provided in the Field
Emergency Kit Assy.
There are two types of Signal Brushes as follows. Verify the color of terminal to distinguish each type . (Illustration
3-7).
• CAG Signal Brush Tip: Installed at the lowest two rows (6 Signal Brushes), with RED colored Terminal.
• CA40 Signal Brush Tip: the remaining Signal Brushes. (Terminal not colored).
Illustration 3-7 Signal Brush types
CA40 Signal Brush Tip
CAG Signal Brush Tip

(Only these 6 Signal
Brushes, in RED)
Red colored
3-11 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374

1. Replace the Signal Brush Tip as follows:
a. Remove the Brush Cap of Signal Brush that will be replaced.
b. Identify the type of Signal Brush Tip.
c. Remove the Signal Brush from the HSDCD Brush Block Assy.
d. Insert the new Signal Brush.
e. Fasten the Brush Cap.
Illustration 3-8 Signal Brush replacement
Signal Brush
Brush Cap
Power Brush
3-12 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
POWER BRUSH REPLACEMENT
NOTICE
For an eventual brush breakage, check the type and replace it provided in the Field
Emergency Kit Assy.
1. Replace the Power Brush Tip as follows:
a. Remove the Brush Cap of Power Brush that will be replaced.
b. Remove the Power Brush from the HSDCD Brush Block Assy.
c. Insert the new Power Brush.
d. Fasten the Brush Cap.
3-13 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
Rubbing the brushes
NOTICE
1. Rub the brushes to glide smoothly as follows:
a. Push and free few times the replaced brushes by finger with a kim wipe between the finger and brush and
check whether they glide into the brush holder. (Illustration 3-9).
Illustration 3-9 Gliding the brushes
Brushes
3-14 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
INSTALLATION
1. Install the Brush Block Assy as follows:
a. Insert the Guide Pins (x2) in the Brush Block. (Illustration 3-10).
NOTICE
Certify that the brushes of the Brush Block Assy are correctly in contact and centered with
the groove of Slip Ring.
Move the Brush Block always in perpendicular direction in relation with the Slip Ring
surface.
b. Insert the Brush Block Assy through the Guide Pins. Take care to not to damage the brushes.
Illustration 3-10 Brush Block and guide pins
Guide Pins
3-15 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
Illustration 3-11 Brush Block install

HSDCD Slip Ring
Guide
Pins HSDCD Brush Block
c. When inserting the Brush Block, certify that the Brushes are positioned in the middle of Slip Ring Track and
not in contact with Slip Ring Barrier.
Illustration 3-12 Certify that the Brushes are in contact with the middle of Slip Ring Track
Slip Ring
Slip Ring Barrier
Slip Ring Track
Brush
Brush Block
3-16 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374

d. Push the Brush Block against the Slip Ring and the Brush Block Plate.
e. Fasten the 2 Allen screws gradually. (Illustration 3-13).
Illustration 3-13 Brush Block Assy install
M6x35 Allen Screw pushing si-

screws (x4) multaneously the
Brush Block
Torque=11.5N.m
against the Slip
Ring and the Brush
Block Plate
NOTICE
Certify that the brushes of the Brush Block Assy are correctly in contact with the grove of
Slipring.
f. Remove the Guide Pins.
g. Fasten the remaining 2 Allen screws gradually.
2. Restore the Brush Block Assy to original configuration by referring to step 2.
3. Rotate the Gantry manually to check if the movement is smooth and there is no abnormal noise. Make more
than one complete rotation.
4. Perform the following checks according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment, Gantry.
SIGNAL BRUSH CONTACT
GANTRY INITIALIZE MOVEMENT
MOVEMENT CHECK
5. Perform the following check according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment, DAS/DETEC-
TOR.
DATA TRANSFER CHECK
6. Restore the Gantry and the PDU to the original configuration.
7. END
3-17 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
3-4 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE (RF RECEIVER - DASIFN)
Special Equipment
• Gantry FAN Assy
• Tie wraps
2. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’, and ’Table/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove the Gantry both side and rear covers.
4. Remove the OC rear cover by unscrewing its 4 screws.
5. Disconnect the Optical Fiber Cable connector (J13) from the DASIFN Assy.
6. Disconnect the cable connector from the RF Receiver Assy.
7. Cut the tie-wraps holding the cable to the Gantry frame, and remove it from the Gantry.
8. Install the new Optical Fiber Cable by referring to steps 7. through 5.
9. Restore the Gantry to the original configuration.
10. Restore the OC to the original configuration.
11. END
3-18 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
SECTION 4 - GANTRY STATIONARY - III
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
4-1 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
4-1 POWER SUPPLY (PS1) / (PS2)
Special Equipment
• Power Supply (PS1) / Power Supply (PS2)
• Tie wraps
Power Supply (PS1)

1. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’, ’Table/Tilt’ and ’Slip Ring115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
2. Remove the rear and left side Gantry covers.
3. Pop free and remove the plastic guard from the front of the power supply terminal.
4. Mark and remove the wires from the terminal.
5. Unscrew the three front support screws, and slide it forward and out of the Gantry side frame.
6. Slide the new power supply into place, and screw the front support screws into place.
7. Attach the wires removed from the removed from the old unit.
8. Perform the following adjustment according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment, GAN-
TRY.
DC POWER SUPPLIES
10. END
Power Supply (PS2)

1. Perform the similar way as for Power Supply (PS1).
2. END
4-2 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
4-1 POWER SUPPLY (PS1) / (PS2) (CONTINUED)
Illustration 4-1 Power Supply (PS1) / (PS2) Removal
Gantry Left Side
Power Supply (PS1)
Screw (x 3)
Power Supply (PS1)
Screw (x 3)
4-3 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
4-2 NAA2 ASSY
Special Equipment
• NAA2 Assy
2. Remove the left side Gantry cover.
3. Remove the four cable connectors (CN2, CN3, CN4 and CN6) from the NAA2 Assy.
4. Unscrew four screws, and remove the NAA2 Assy by pulling the device straight out from the TGP connector
(CN6).
6. Perform the following adjustment according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment, GAN-
TRY.
AUDIO FUNCTION TEST
8. END
4-4 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
4-3 COVER SWITCH ASSY
Special Equipment
• Cover Switch Assy
• Tie wraps
2. Remove the right side Gantry cover.
3. Disconnect the cable connector (CN34) leading from the Cover Switch Assy.
4. Cut the tie-wraps holding the cables to the Gantry side frame.
5. Remove the cover switch (x 5) by unscrewing its two screws (x5), and remove the Cover Switch Assy.
6. Install the new Cover Switch Assy by referring to step 5 to 3.
7. Verify that cover switches are operating normally.
9. END
4-5 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
4-4 SDS BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• SDS Board Assy
3. Remove the Gantry both side and front covers.
4. Disconnect the two cable connectors (CN1 and CN2) from the SDS Board assy.
5. Remove the SDS Board Assy by unscrewing its four screws.
6. Install the new SDS Board Assy by referring to steps 5. through 4.
7. Check that the switches on the SDS Board Assy can be operated normally.
9. END
Illustration 4-2 SDS Board Assy Location
CN1
SDS Board
Assy
4-6 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
4-5 SERVO AMPLIFIER
Special Equipment
• Servo Amplifier Assy
• Tie wraps
1. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’, ’Table/Tilt’and ’Slip Ring115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
2. Turn OFF the power from the OC.
3. Remove the Gantry left side cover.
4. Label and remove the wires attached to terminals ‘TB2’ of the Servo Amplifier.
5. Disconnect the two cable connectors from CN1 and CN2.
Note
Before disconnecting CN1 and CN2, loosen the locking screws (see illustration 4-3).
6. Remove the amplifier by unscrewing its four screws with a long Phillips (plus) screw driver.
Illustration 4-3 Servo Amplifier Cable Disconnection
Screws (x 4)
Push Tab
CN1
CN2
Lock Screw
Push Tab
TB2
Lock Screw
4-7 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
4-5 SERVO AMPLIFIER (CONTINUED)

7. Attach the furnished amplifier using the screws removed in step 6.
8. Connect all wires removed from the terminal ’TB2’ to the new Servo Amplifier terminals according to their
labels.
9. Connect the two cable connectors to CN1 and CN2.
10. Switch ON the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’, ’Table/Tilt’and ’Slip Ring115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
11. Turn ON the power from the OC.
12. Perform the minor adjustments in the following order according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check &
Adjustment, Gantry, Rotation Operation:
MOVEMENT CHECK
ROTATION VELOCITY OFFSET
ROTATION SPEED
ROTATION DECELERATION
13. END
4-8 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
4-6 GANTRY MAIN BEARING GREASE-UP
Special Equipment
• Grease Gun
• Grease Cartridge : Shell Alvania grease#2 NEW (U0411BD)
1. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’ and ’XG Power’ switches at the rear Gantry base.
2. Remove both side covers from the Gantry.
3. Switch ON the service switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
Note
New grease must be used. Do NOT reuse a grease cartridge; open a brand new grease cartridge
every time you perform this operation.
4. Input the grease(SHELL ALVANIA grease #2) into the grease gun.
5. Attach the grease gun to the bearing grease nipple (see illustration 4-4).
Illustration 4-4 Grease Nipple (fitting)
Grease Nipple
Tilt Cylinder
4-9 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
4-6 GANTRY MAIN BEARING GREASE-UP (CONTINUED)
NOTICE
Slow pumping operation is required.
If pumped fast, new grease will be soon ejected so that new grease can NOT reach the main
bearing.
6. Inject the grease (one cartridge) while rotating the Gantry slowly by hand. Any grease which leaks between the
shaft of main bearing and housing must be wiped clean.
7. Switch OFF the service switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
8. Switch ON the ’Rotate’ and ’XG Power’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
9. Rotate the Gantry for approximately 10 minutes using the toggle switches on the TGP board and verify that the
Gantry rotation is smooth.
10. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’ and ’XG Power’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
11. Wipe clean any grease which has leaked between the bearing and the housing.
12. Install the Gantry rear and both side covers.
13. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
14. END
4-10 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
4-7 SERVO MOTOR
Special Equipment
• Axial Motor Assy
• Tie wraps
• CRC of equivalent (WD40, etc...)
1. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’ and ’Slip Ring115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
2. Remove the front, rear and both side covers from the Gantry.
3. Rotate the Gantry until the x-ray tube reaches the 6 o’clock position.
a. Switch ON the service switch on the SUB board.
b. Rotate the Gantry until the x-ray tube reaches the 6 o’clock position by hand.
c. Insert the Azimuth lock pin.
d. Switch OFF the service switch on the SUB board.
4. Remove the bottom side cover.
5. Remove the Axial Motor Pulley cover by unscrewing its 3 screws.
6. Remove the Axial Drive Belt from the Axial Motor Pulley (see illustration 7-13).
a. Loosen the three mounting plate bolts
b. Loosen the lock nut of the belt tension adjuster.
c. Loosen the adjustment bolt to relieve drive belt tension.
d. Remove the axial drive belt from the axial motor pulley.
4-11 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
4-7 SERVO MOTOR (CONTINUED)

7. Disconnect the encoder cable connector connected to the Axial Motor assy.
8. Disconnect the power cable connector connected to the Axial Motor assy.
9. Remove the GND cable from the Axial Motor assy.
10. Remove the Axial Motor from the mounting plate by unscrewing its 4 Allen screws.
11. Remove the Sleeve and Axial Motor Pulley.
a. Remove the three Allen screws.
b. Insert the two Allen screws into the ’Release Hole’ at the Sleeve.
c. Release the Sleeve by screwing down the two Allen screws and remove the Sleeve from the Axial Motor
shaft.
d. Remove the Axial Motor Pulley from the Axial Motor shaft.
Illustration 4-5 Removal of the Axial Motor
Allen Screws
Encoder Cable
Connector Pulley
Sleeve
GND Cable
Release
Power Cable Hole
Connector
Release Allen Screws
Hole
4-12 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
4-7 SERVO MOTOR (CONTINUED)

12. Clean and lubricate the Axial Motor shaft surface using the light grade machine oil such as CRC, WD40, etc.
13. Insert and push the Axial Motor Pulley all the way onto the shaft of the new Axial Motor assy.
14. Insert the Sleeve and progressively tighten each screw using the repeated sequence show in illustration 4-6.
a. Tighten each screw with 2N.m.
b. Tighten each screw with 4N.m.
c. Tighten each screw with 8N.m.
Illustration 4-6 Sleeve Tightening
Sleeve Release Hole

1
Pulley
Release Hole
15. Install the new Axial Motor assy by referring to steps 10. through 6.
16. Adjust the belt tension according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment, Gantry.
17. Perform the following checks according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment, Gantry.
MOVEMENT CHECK
ROTATION SPEED
18. Install the Axial Motor Pulley cover
20. END
4-13 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
4-8 TGP BOARD
Special Equipment
• TGP Board
1. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’, ‘Table/Tilt’ and ‘Slip Ring115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
2. Remove the Gantry left side cover.
3. Write down the following dip switch settings. Refer to the CD-ROM manual, Functional check & Adjustment,
Switch/Jumper Setting of Boars/Devices.
Switch Setting (ON or OFF)

S1 - T2
S1 - T4
S2 - G4
4. Remove TGP board assy by removing all the screws and connectors.
5. Install new TGP board assy using the screws removed in step 4.
6. Check the TGP board switch and jumper configuration according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional check &
Adjustment, Switch/Jumper Setting of Boars/Devices.
For the dip switch settings of S1 - T2, S1 - T4, and S2 - G4, set them according to the table at step 3.
7. Connect all the connectors removed in step 4.
8. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’, ‘Table/Tilt’ and ‘Slip Ring115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
9. Perform the following adjustments in the following order according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check
& Adjustment, Gantry or Table.
MOVEMENT CHECK
ROTATION SPEED
SHORT-FOOT-PRINT FUNCTION (Table tab; for systems with dip switch S1 - T2 or S1 - T4 being set
to ON only)
10. Install the front and left side Gantry covers.
11. END
4-14 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
4-9 SUB BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• SUB Board Assy
1. Set the Gantry to the 0 degree position and lower the Table to its lowest position.
2. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’, and ‘Table/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove the left side cover from the Gantry.
4. Disconnect the all cable connectors from the SUB Board Assy.
5. Remove the SUB Board Assy by unscrewing its six screws.
6. Install the new SUB Board Assy by using the screws removed in step 5.
7. Connect all the connectors removed in step 4.
8. Check that the following functions are operating normally.
• Gantry Tilt Function (FWD ↔ BWD)
• Table Elevation Function (UP ↔ DOWN)
• Cradle Longitudinal Function (IN ↔ OUT)
10. END
4-15 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
4-10 GANTRY ROTATION COUNTER (2310012)

The rotation counter (2310012) must be installed following the procedure below.
1. Set the Gantry to the 0 degree tilt position.
2. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’, and ‘Table/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove the Gantry front cover and left side cover.
4. Remove the rotation counter to be replaced from the Gantry.
5. Check the rotation counter cable terminals:
If the cable terminals are too big to connect the new counter, cut the side edge of the terminals.
Illustration 4-7 Cutting the cable terminal
Cut !
6. Remove the counter holder from the new counter, then remove the two screws from the holder. Discard the
two screws. (The counter holder will be re-used later.)
Illustration 4-8 Removing the Counter Holder
Counter Holder
Screws
4-16 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
7. Set the rotation counter as follows:
a. Remove the insulation sheet from the new rotation counter to activate the battery installed into the counter.
(The counter indication will be ramdomly displayed.)
b. Set the SW2 to the terminal side. (1 kHz selected)
c. Press the RST (Reset) button to set the counter to “0”. Verify that the counter indication is “0”.
d. Set the SW1 to the terminal side. (Key protection - ON selected)
Illustration 4-9 Setting the Counter
Step a. Step b.
Insulation Sheet
2 1
Step c. Step d.
2 1
Reset Button
4-17 GANTRY
REV 1 5116374
8. Put the counter holder into the cables, disconnected at step 4, then pull the cables outward through the Gantry
frame hole where the counter will be installed.
9. Put the rubber seal into the counter.
10. Connect the cables to the terminals of the counters; Red cable to No.1 terminal, and Black cable to No.2
terminal.
11. Install the new rotation counter until the counter holder holds the counter securely.
12. Install the terminal protector (plastic) onto the terminal.
Illustration 4-10 Installing the Counter to the Gantry
Holder
Counter
Protector
1 2 3 4
Rubber
Seal
Gantry
Frame
Red
Black

14. END
4-18 GANTRY
REV 16 5116374
SECTION 5 - GANTRY STATIONARY - IV
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
5-1 GANTRY
REV 16 5116374
5-1 TILT POTENTIOMETER
Special Equipment
• Tilt Potentiometer Assy
• DVM (Digital Volt Meter)
• Tiewraps
3. Remove the front and left side covers from the Gantry.
4. Remove the wiring duct cover by unscrewing its six screws. (Illustration 5-1)
5. Cut the tie wrap securing the wires leading to the Tilt Potentiometer and disconnect connector CN15 from the
TGP Board.
Illustration 5-1 Tilt Potentiometer Location
Screws (x6)
Wiring Duct Cover
Tilt Potentiometer
5-2 GANTRY
REV 16 5116374
5-1 TILT POTENTIOMETER (CONTINUED)

6. Remove the Tilt Potentiometer Assy from the Support Bracket by loosening the nut.(Illustration 5-2).
Illustration 5-2 Tilt Potentiometer
Nut
Tilt Potentiometer Arm (cut view)
CN15
1
2 Rack
3
4
Support Bracket
Gear
5-3 GANTRY
REV 16 5116374
5-1 TILT POTENTIOMETER (CONTINUED)

7. Before installing the new Tilt Potentiometer, turn the potentiometer pivot clockwise until minimum resistance
and then turn about 5 turns counter-clockwise. This will help to find the 2.5KΩ resistance, explained in the next
step.
8. Attach a DVM between Pin 2 and Pin 3 (Illustration 5-2) of the connector CN15 and measure the total
resistance over the new Potentiometer. Rotate the potentiometer pivot until the DVM value is 2.5KΩ +/- 30Ω.
9. Install the Potentiometer and verify that the resistance is the same as before installed, attach the DVM between
Pin 2 and Pin 3 of the Connector CN15 again and measure the total resistance. If the resistance is not 2.5KΩ
+/- 30Ω, then loosen the two nuts that hold the potentiometer assy and repeat step 8.
10. Verify that the Tilt Potentiometer gear and Rack gear are in constant mesh. (Illustration 5-3).
11. Feed the connector CN15 up the outboard side of the Gantry frame and connect it to the TGP Board.
Illustration 5-3 Gears in mesh

Tilt Potentiometer
Rack gear
Tilt Potentiometer gear
12. Switch ON the “Table/Tilt” switches.

13. Tilt the Gantry from the FWD 20° to the BWD 20° position, and verify that Tilt POT rotates smoothly.
14. Retie the tie wraps which were removed in step 5.
15. Install the wiring duct cover by screwing its six screws.
16. Switch ON the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’, ’Table/Tilt’ and ’Slip Ring115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
17. Perform T0, TG Adjustment. (Refer to CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment, Gantry)
18. END
5-4 GANTRY
REV 16 5116374
5-2 HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
Special Equipment
• Hydraulic Cylinder Assy
• Oil (Z9807QD)
• Sealing Tape (PTFE)
• Tilt Stopper/Shipping Lock
• Tie wraps
WARNING
CRASH HAZARD!
DO NOT ADJUST THE THROTTLE DIALS OF THE SOLENOID VALVE OR REPLACE BOTH
CYLINDERS TOGETHER AT THE SAME TIME.

1. Set the Gantry to the home position.
2. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’ and ’XG Power’ and switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove the rear and both side covers from the Gantry.
4. Move the Table to approximately the -150mm position.
5. Lock the Gantry from tilting using the shipping locks. If the cylinders are not fully functional proceed according
to the following trouble situation chart.
Current Tilt Angle Procedure
Tilt adjusting holes

Remove the Tilt Stopper from the cover stand.
Remove a Allen screw fastening the tilt rail to the tilt arm.
Attach the EM Tilt Stopper to the tilt rail at both sides using the
Allen screw removed in the previous step, then lock the
Gantry tilt.
The tilt angle is ajustable by using the proper tilt adjusting
holes.
Tilt Rail
EM Tilt
Stopper
5-5 GANTRY
REV 16 5116374
5-2 HYDRAULIC CYLINDER (CONTINUED)

6. Switch OFF the ’Table/Tilt’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
7. Cut the tie wraps holding the oil hoses to the inboard (inside) side of the Gantry side frame.
8. Remove the cylinder bracket by unscrewing its 2 Allen screws.
9. Remove the Allen screw holding the cylinder in place at bottom end, and pull free the cylinder assembly.
10. Remove the oil input and output hoses by unscrewing the hose nuts.
Note
When removing the oil hoses, keep the input(bottom inlet) hose vertical so that no oil drips out of it.
Any oil which drips out will be replaced by air which will enter the new cylinder during reinstallation.
11. Remove the two elbow joints, one from each end, and wrap sealing tape around the sends which are screwed
into the cylinder. These elbows will be attached to the new cylinder later.
Note
When applying sealing tape to elbow joints wrap the tape about one and a half times in the opposite
direction of the thread.
Illustration 5-4 Tilt Cylinder Location
Bracket
Allen
Screws(2)
Rod End
Bracket
Hose
Nut Allen Screw
and Washer
5-6 GANTRY
REV 16 5116374

12. Remove the rod end from the old cylinder and attach it to the new cylinder as show in illustration 5-5.
Illustration 5-5 Hydraulic Cylinder Rod End
13mm + 1mm
Rod End
Fix Nut
New Cylinder
13. Fill a clean receptacle with enough Oil (Z9807QD) to cover the end of the cylinder as shown in illustration 5-6.
Place the oil input end of the cylinder assembly into the oil and pull the rod end so as to suck oil onto the
cylinder. Stop when the length of the cylinder assembly is about 40cm longer than the distance needed to reach
from the holding pivot to the support bracket.
14. Turn the cylinder around so that the input end is pointing skyward and wait 1∼2 minutes for any air to settle to
the top.
15. Push the rod end into the cylinder while holding the cylinder firmly. A mixture of air and oil should come out of
the skyward hole. Continue until only oil comes out and all air is removed from the cylinder.
Illustration 5-6 Tilt Cylinder Oil Filling Procedure
Air Hole
Oil
5-7 GANTRY
REV 16 5116374

16. Attach the elbow joints removed from the old cylinder to the new one.
17. Connect all oil hoses to the new cylinder.
18. Rest the cylinder on the pivot support and open the air hole by rotating it CCW approximately three times.
Note
Do not unscrew the air hole screw. Simply turning it approximately three times is sufficient for it to
allow air or oil to escape.
19. Push down on the rod end until the cylinder assembly fits neatly into the bracket and the pivot. A firm force will
be required to push the rod end down and force the excess oil to drip out of the air hole.
20. Close the air hole by rotating its plug CW fully.
21. Attach the cylinder assembly and secure it with the double nuts at both the pivot and bracket ends.
22. Fasten the oil hoses to the inboard (inside) side of the Gantry side base with tie wraps.
23. Check if the Gantry tilt is operating correctly.
a. Remove the shipping locks and any residual oil left on the cylinder.
b. Switch ON the ’Table/Tilt’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
c. Tilt the Gantry FWD 20 deg. and verify that it operates smoothly.
d. Tilt the Gantry BWD 20 deg. and verify that the operation is smooth.
e. Repeat step 23c. and 23d. a few times to remove any air in the pump or cylinder.
25. Perform a Tilt Speed Adjustment. (Refer to CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment)
26. END
5-8 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
SECTION 6 - GANTRY ROTATIONAL - I
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
6-1 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
6-1 COLLIMATOR FILTER ASSY
Special Equipment
• Filter
1. Set the Gantry to the 0° tilt and the HOME position.
2. Switch OFF the “Rotate” and “XG Power” switches at the Gantry rear base.
4. Cut any Tie-wraps holding the Photo Sensor cable to the Collimator Assy, and unscrew 3 nuts and an Allen
Screw, the remove the collimator cover.
NOTICE
Fragile part. The Photo Sensors are very sensitive. Be careful not to bend them.
Illustration 6-1 Photo Sensor Cable Configuration
Tie-wraps
6-2 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
6-1 COLLIMATOR FILTER ASSY (CONTINUED)

5. Remove the two long hexa screws and the filter indicated in illustration 6-2.
6. Install the new FILTER by referring steps 5. through 4.
7. Perform the following check/adjustment procedures according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check &
Adjustment, System:
FILTER CENTER ALIGNMENT
CALIBRATION (Air and Phantom)
CT NO. ADJUSTMENT
9. END
Illustration 6-2 Filter
Photo Sensor Long hexa Screws Filter Assy
Protect Bracket
Stepping Motor Filter
FILTER REMOVAL PATH
(COLLIMATOR FRONT VIEW) (SIDE VIEW)
6-3 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
6-2 COLLIMATOR ASSY
Special Equipment
• Collimator Assy
2. Switch OFF the “Rotate”, “Slipring 115V” and “XG Power” switches at the Gantry rear base.
4. Remove the X-Ray Tube from the Collimator Assy refer to X-Ray Tube replacement procedure.
X-RAY GENERATOR -> Section 3 X-Ray Tube
5. Rotate the Gantry to 180° position by hand.
6. Insert the azimuth lock pin.
7. Disconnect the Positioning Light Cable Connector.
8. Cut any tie-wraps holding the cables under the Positioning Light.
9. Remove the Position Light from the Collimator Assy by unscrewing its 5 screws.
Illustration 6-3 Remove the Positioning Light
Positioning Light
Cable Connector
Screw (x5)
Torque: 70kgf.cm
10. Cut any tie-wrap holding cables and disconnect all cable connectors from the Collimator Assy.
6-4 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
6-2 COLLIMATOR ASSY (CONTINUED)
NOTICE
Fragile part.
The Photo Sensor and cables are very sensitive. Be careful not to bend them.
Illustration 6-4 Disconnect Cable Connectors from the Collimator Assy

Allen Screw (X4)
Torque: 563kgf.cm
Encoder Cable
Motor Cable
Ground Cable
Sensor Cable
Photo Sensor Cable
11. Remove the Collimator Assy from the support frame by unscrewing its four Allen screws. (See illustration 6-4)
12. Install the new Collimator Assy in reverse order of removal. (Torque: 563kgf.cm)
13. Adjust the Aperture with the Aperture Alignment Tool according to Functional Check & Adjustment, System,
APERTURE POSITION ALIGNMENT.
14. Reinstall the X-Ray Tube (Torque: 285kgf.cm) and Positioning Light (Torque: 70kgf.cm) in reverse order of re-
moval.
15. Retie any tie-wraps which were removed.
16. Perform the following check/adjustment procedures according to manual, Functional Check & Adjustment.
CLEARANCE BETWEEN ROTATIONAL AND STATIONARY COMPONENTS
POSITIONING LIGHTS ADJUSTMENT
X-RAY ALIGNMENT
KV AND mA CHECK
DAS COUNT CHECK
Q CALIBRATION (Q-Cal)
SYSTEM CALIBRATION
CT NO. ADJUSTMENT
IMAGE PERFORMANCE
18. END.
6-5 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
6-3 APERTURE ASSY
Special Equipment
• Aperture
4. Cut any Tie-wrap holding the Photo Sensor cable to the Collimator Assy (see illustration 6-1), and remove the
Collimator Cover by unscrewing its 3 nuts and an allen screw.
NOTICE
Fragile part.
The Photo Sensor and cables are very sensitive. Be careful not to bend them.
Illustration 6-5 Collimator Cover Removal
Nuts (x3) + Allen Screw (x1)

(Torque: 31Kgf.cm)
5. Switch ON the Service Switch and rotate the Gantry until the x-ray tube reaches the 6 o’clock position by hand.
6. Switch OFF the Service Switch.
7. Disconnect the connectors of the Stepping Motor, Photo Sensor and Encoder.
8. Unscrew the 3 screws which fix the Aperture onto the Z-axis Motor Base. (See Illustration 6-6)
9. Remove the Aperture Assy from the Collimator by unscrewing its 4 nuts. (See Illustration 6-6)
6-6 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
6-3 APERTURE ASSY (CONTINUED)
Illustration 6-6 Aperture Assy Removal
Motor
Stepping Motor Connector
Sensor
Connector
Screw (x3)
(Torque: 16Kgf.cm)
Nut (x4) For fixing the Aperture onto
the z-axis motor base
Encoder
10. Install the new Aperture Assy to the Collimator. (Torque refer to Illustration 6-6)
11. Reconnect the connectors of the Stepping Motor, Photo Sensor and Encoder.
12. Install the Collimator Cover by screwing its 3 nuts and an allen screw. (Torque: 31Kgf.cm)
13. Fix the cables with Tie-wraps.
14. Perform Aperture Ratio Check and Image Performance Verification according to Functional Check&Adjust-
ment manual.
15. End.
6-7 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
6-4 APERTURE Z-AXIS BELT
Special Equipment
• Aperture Z-Axis Belt
2. Switch OFF the “Rotate”,”XG Power” and ”Slip Ring 115V”switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove the front, rear, and left maintenance covers from the Gantry.
4. Switch ON the Service Switch on the SUB board.
5. Rotate the Gantry until the x-ray tube reaches the 12 o’clock position by hand.
7. Cut any Tie-wraps holding the Photo Sensor cable to the Collimator Assy (see illustration 6-1),and unscrew 3
nuts and an Allen Screw, then remove the collimator cover.
NOTICE
Fragile part. The Photo Sensor and cables are very sensitive.Be careful not to bend them.
8. Disconnect the cable connector of the z-axis motor.
9. Unscrew a Nylon nut and Allen screw to relieve the belt tension.
10. Remove the belt.
11. Install the new belt by referring to step 9.through 7.
12. Perform the Aperture Z-Axis Belt Tension according to the CD-ROM manual, Function Check&Adjustment,
Gantry.
Illustration 6-7 Aperture Z-Axis Belt

Nylon Nut
Aperture Z–Axis Belt
Allen Screw
6-8 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
6-5 APERTURE Z-AXIS MOTOR
Special Equipment
• Aperture Z-Axis Motor
2. Switch OFF the “Rotate”,”XG Power” and”Slip Ring 115V”switches at the Gantry rear base.
4. Cut any Tie-wraps holding the Photo Sensor cable to the Collimator Assy (see illustration 6-1), and unscrew 3
NOTICE
6-9 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
6-5 APERTURE Z-AXIS MOTOR (CONTINUED)

8. Disconnect the cable connector of the z-axis motor.
9. Loosen the 4 set screws to relieve belt tension.
10. Unscrew a Nylon nut and an Allen screw, and remove the support bracket with the motor from the collimator
assy.
11. Remove the support bracket from the motor by unscrewing its 4 screws, and transfer it yo the new z-axis motor.
12. Install the new motor with bracket to the collimator assy by referring to step 10 through 8.
13. Perform the Aperture Z-axis Belt Tension according to the CD-ROM manual, Function Check&Adjustment,
Gantry.
15. END
Illustration 6-8 Z-Axis Motor Assy Replacement
Nylon Nut
Set Screws
Screw (x4)
Z–Axis Motor assy
Set Screws
Allen Screw
Support Bracket
6-10 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
6-6 SCREW ASSY
Special Equipment
• Screw Assy
2. Switch OFF the “Rotate”, ”XG Power” and ”Slip Ring 115V”switches at the Gantry rear base.
4. Cut any Tie-wraps holding the Photo Sensor cable to the Collimator Assy (see illustration 6-1), and unscrew 3
NOTICE
8. Remove the following components:
APERTURE............(refer to Aperture)
Z-AXIS MOTOR.......(refer to Aperture Z-axis Motor)
6-11 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
6-6 SCREW ASSY (CONTINUED)

9. Remove the BWD End Stopper by unscrewing its 2 screws.
10. Move the Joint Bracket backward by rotating the pulley.
11. Remove the Screw Assy by unscrewing its 4 screws.
12. Install the new Screw Assy by referring to step 11.through 8.
13. Perform the Aperture Z-Axis Belt Tension according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check& Adjustment,
Gantry.
15. END.
Illustration 6-9 Screw Assy Replacement
Joint Bracket
BWD End Stopper
Pulley
6-12 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
6-7 SENSOR ASSY
Special Equipment
• Sensor Assy
• Tie-wrap
2. Switch OFF the “Rotate”,”XG Power” and”Slip Ring 115V”switches at the Gantry rear base.
4. Cut any Tie-wraps holding the Photo Sensor cable to the Collimator Assy (see illustration 6-1),and unscrew 3
NOTICE
APERTURE............... (refer to Aperture)
BOW-TIE FILTER....... (refer to Bow-Tie Filter)
6-13 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
6-7 SENSOR ASSY(CONTINUED)

9. Disconnect the cable connector of the Sensor Assy.
10. Cut the tie-wrap holding the cable to the Collimator Assy.
11. Unscrew the two Allen screws, and remove the Sensor Assy from the Collimator.
12. Install the new Sensor Assy.
13. Adjust the gap between the Sensor Assy and the Collimator frame so that it becomes 1mm(using the Thickness
Gauge), and tighten the two screws.
14. Fasten the cable to the tie-wrap base with tie-wraps.
Illustration 6-10 Sensor Assy Replacement
Sensor Assy
Screws
1mm
Sensor
Assy
6-14 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
6-8 APERTURE MOTOR DRIVER

1. Rotate the Gantry to the zero degree tube position.
3. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’ switch at rear Gantry base.
5. Disconnect the two connectors of the Aperture Motor Driver Assy (Illustration 6-11).
6. Remove the four nuts shown in illustration 6-11 to remove the Aperture Motor Driver mounting bracket.
Illustration 6-11 Aperture Motor Driver Removal
Aperture Motor
Driver
Mounting Plate
Cover
6-15 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
6-8 APERTURE MOTOR DRIVER (CONTINUED)

7. Remove two screws that secure Aperture Motor Driver Assy to the mounting bracket, at the back side
(Illustration 6-12).
8. Install new Aperture Motor Driver Assy by referring to steps 7 through 2.
10. END
Illustration 6-12 Aperture Motor Driver Assy Removal from the mounting bracket
Screws
Mounting Bracket
Aperture Motor Driver
6-16 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
SECTION 7 - GANTRY ROTATIONAL - II
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
7-1 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
7-1 POWER SUPPLY
7-1-1 Power Supply (MDAS)
Sepcial Equipment
• Power Supply (2369490)
1. Switch OFF the “Rotate”, “XG Power” and “Slip Ring 115V” switches at the rear Gantry base.
2. Remove the front, left and right side covers from the Gantry.
3. Switch ON the Service Switch, then rotate the Gantry to approximately 190° tube position.
5. Insert the Azimuth lock pin.
Illustration 7-1 Power Supply position
Gantry Rear Mounting Plate
Power Supply Trans Box
Temp Cont
Screws
7-2 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
7-1-1 Power Supply (MDAS) (Continued)

6. Disconnect the cable connectors from the Power Supply.
7. Remove the two screws on the Top Side and the two screws on the Bottom Side (Illustration 7-2).
Note
When all the screws are removed, push the Power Supply onto the Plate to prevent it from falling
down from the orientation pins.
Illustration 7-2 DAS Power Supply Cables Removal
Cables
Cables
Bottom Side of
the Power Supply
Screw
Top Side of
the Power Supply
Orientation Pin Screw Orientation Pin
8. Remove the Power Supply from the Gantry.

9. To install the new Power Supply, reverse the previouse steps.
Note
When put the Power Supply on the Gantry, firstly locate the holes (on the Top and the Bottom sides
of the Power Supply) on the orientation pins and push the Power Supply onto the Plate with one
hand, to prevent it from falling down.
11. END
7-3 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
7-1-2 Power Supply (GDAS)
Sepcial Equipment
6. Disconnect the cable connectors from the Power Supply. (Illustration 7-3)
Illustration 7-3 Cables of PS
Power Cable (Input)
Mounting Plate
DAS Power
RF Cable Cable (Output)
(Output)
Collimator
OGP Cable (Output)
(Output)
7-4 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
7-1-2 Power Supply (GDAS) (Continued)

7. Cut the tie-wrap fixed on the hole of Power Supply handle shown as below.
CAUTION
Be care not to snip the cables bound on the hole of the Power Supply handle with tie-wrap.
Illustration 7-4 Hole of the PS Handle
Left
Orientation
Pin
Right
Right
Front Hole for binding Power Supply

Front Cables Handle
8. Remove the Power Supply by unscrewing its four screws from the Mounting Plate. (See Illustration 7-1)
Note
9. Install the new Power Supply and connect the cable connectors.
Note
10. Bind the cables beside the Power Supply to the hole of Power Supply handle with tie-wrap according to step 7.
NOTICE
Be sure that the cables are far from the bearing, and do not bind them tightly with tie-wrap
to avoid cutting cable during future possible replacement.
12. END
7-5 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
7-2 OGP BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• OGP Assy
• Tie wraps
2. Switch OFF the “Rotate”, “XG Power” and “Slip Ring115V” switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove the front,right side, and left maintenance covers from the Gantry.
4. Switch ON the service switch on the SUB board near the TGP board, and rotate the Gantry until the OGP Assy
reaches the 3 o’clock position by hand, then switch OFF the service switch. (Illustration 7-5).
5. Cut the tie-wraps holding the cables to the OGP cover.
6. Remove the OGP assy cover by unscrewing its four nuts and two screws.
7. Disconnect the ten cable connectors (CN1 ∼ CN10) from the OGP board.
8. Remove the two Allen screws and one nut that fasten the connector frame to the OGP support frame.
9. Remove the OGP board with connector frame by unscrewing eight screws.
10. Remove the connector frame by unscrewing the four studs, and transfer the connector frame to the new OGP
board.
11. Install the new OGP board (with connector frame) by referring to step 9 to 5.
13. Rotate the Gantry manually to check if the movement is smooth and the cables does not catch on any
stationary components. Make more than one complete rotation.
15. Perform Test Scan according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment, System.
17. END
7-6 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
7-2 OGP BOARD ASSY (CONTINUED)
Illustration 7-5 OGP Board Assy Removal
OGP Cover
Connector Bracket OGP Board Assy
OGP Support
Frame
7-7 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
7-3 DCP2 ASSY (MDAS)
Special Equipment
• DCP2 Assy
2. Remove the front, right side, and left maintenance covers from the Gantry.
3. Switch ON the service switch on the SUB board near the TGP board, and rotate the Gantry to 12 o’clock
position by hand, then switch OFF the service switch.
4. Remove the DCP2 assy cover (with its connected side cover) by unscrewing its 3 nuts (see illustration 7-6).
5. Disconnect the three cable connectors (CN1, CN2, J4) from DCP2 assy.
6. Remove the connector bracket together with the DCP2 assy by unscrewing 4 screws and 2 Allen screws (see
illustration 7-6).
7. Remove the 2 set nuts and transfer the connector bracket to the new DCP2 assy. Tighten the bracket in place
using the set nuts (see illustration 7-6).
8. Install the new DCP2 assy/connector bracket by referring to steps 6. through 4.
12. Perform Data Transfer Check according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment -> Gantry.
13. Install the front and both side Gantry covers.
14. Switch ON the “Rotate”, “XG Power” and “Slip Ring115V” switches at the Gantry rear base.
15. END
7-8 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
7-3 DCP2 ASSY (CONTINUED)
Illustration 7-6 DCP2 Assy Removal
Behind Gantry DCP2 Assy

Rotational Frame Connector
Bracket
OGP Assy Set Nuts
Connector
Bracket
DCP2 Assy
Allen Screw
Gantry DCP2 Assy Cover

Rotational
Frame DCP2 Assy Cover
DCP2 Assy
Connector Bracket
7-9 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
7-3-1 DCP2 ARM ROM Assy and DCP2 FPGA ROM Assy
Note
This section describes the procedures of replacing DCP2 ARM ROM ASSY and DCP2 FPGA ASSY
(either or both).
NOTICE
Follow ALL Electro-Static Discharge procedures.
Always use ESD Wrist Strap and grounding cords.
The use of a ground Monitor is suggested.
Special Equipment
• DCP2 ARM ROM Assy or/and DCP2 FPGA ROM Assy
• ESD Wrist Strap
2. Remove the front, right side, and left maintenance covers from the Gantry.
3. Switch ON the service switch on the SUB board near the TGP board, and rotate the Gantry to 12 o’clock
position by hand, then switch OFF the service switch.
4. Remove the DCP2 assy cover (with its connected side cover) by unscrewing its 3 nuts (see illustration 7-6).
5. Remove the DCP2 ARM ROM assy or/and DCP2 FPGA ROM assy.
6. Install new ROM(s) respectively at CPU_U04 and CPU_U05 according to the labels on the ROM chips (see
illustration 7-7).
7. Install the DCP2 assy cover with its connected side cover.
11. Perform Data Transfer Check according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment -> Gantry.
12. Install the front and both side Gantry covers.
13. Switch ON the “Rotate”, “XG Power” and “Slip Ring115V” switches at the Gantry rear base.
14. END
7-10 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
7-3-1 DCP2 ARM ROM Assy or/and DCP2 FPGA ROM Assy (Continued)
Illustration 7-7 DCP2 ARM ROM Assy or/and DCP2 FPGA ROM Assy
DCP2 Board
7-11 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
7-4 PHOTO SENSOR (GPLS1, GPLS2)
Special Equipment
• Photo Sensor
• Tie wraps
3. Remove the front, rear, right side and left maintenance covers.
4. Disconnect the cable connector from the defective Photo Sensor.
5. Remove the defective Photo Sensor by unscrewing its 2 screws.
6. Install the new Photo Sensor by referring steps 5. through 4.
8. END
Illustration 7-8 Photo Sensor
Plate Gantry Frame
STATIONARY SIDE
Photo Sensor
(G. Pulse 2)
ROTATIONAL SIDE
Photo Sensor
(G. Pulse 1)
7-12 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
7-5 AXIAL DRIVE BELT
Special Equipment
• Axial Drive Belt
• Tie wraps
1. Remove the PDU front cover by inscrewing its 2 screws.
2. Switch OFF the CB1 and CB5 breakers in the PDU.
3. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch at the Gantry rear base.
• Both Side maintenance Covers.................Refer to 1-2-3 Gantry Side Cover
• Gantry Rear Cover...............................................Refer to 1-2-2 Gantry Rear Cover
• HSDCD Receiver Cover............................Four(4) Screws (See Illustration 7-9)
• All Slip Ring Covers
• Slip Ring Support Plate............................6 x Two(2) Screws (See Illustration 7-10)
• Axial Motor Pulley Cover..........................Four(4) Screws (See Illustration 7-13)
Illustration 7-9 Remove the HSDCD Receiver Cover

Gantry Rear
Screw (x4)
Receiver Cover
7-13 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
7-5 AXIAL DRIVE BELT (CONTINUED)
Illustration 7-10 Remove the Slip Ring Support Plate
Gantry Rear
Slip Ring Support Slip Ring Support

(x6) Plate (X6)
Screw (x2)

6. Remove the HSDCD Receiver Assy (includes antenna and bracket) as follows:
a. Disconnect the Power cable and the Optical Fiber Cable connectors from HSDCD Receiver Assy. (See
Illustration 7-11)
b. Remove the HSDCD Receiver Assy by unscrewing its two screws (see Illustration 7-11).
Illustration 7-11 Remove the HSDCD Receiver Assy
Gantry Frame
Screw (x2)
HSDCD Receiver
Cables (Power Cable and

Optical Fiber Cable)
Screw (x2) HSDCD Receiver RF Cables (Optical Fiber Cable_J1

and Power Cable_J2)
7-14 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
CAUTION
7. Remove the Slip Ring Brush Block Assy from the brush mounting plate, detailed processes refer to 3-3 HSDCD
Brush Assy -> Brush Block Removal.
a. Disconnect the cable connector CN1 connected to the signal brush board.
b. Remove the Terminal cover from the HSDCD Brush Block Assy by unscrewing its 2 screws.
d. Remove the Brush Block Assy by unscrewing its 2 border allen screws.
e. Remove the HSDCD Brush Block always keeping in the perpendicular direction with the Slip Ring to avoid
a brush breakage.
Illustration 7-12 Brush Block Assy
Power Cables
(M6:6N.m)
Terminal Cover
(M4:1.8N.m)
Power Cables
DO NOT
Screws (x2)
SCREW/
UNSCREW THE
ADJUSMENT
SCREWS AND
NUTS
Connector
Signal CN1
Middle Power
Screws (x2) Brushes
Signal
Brushes
DO NOT
SCREW/
UNSCREW THE
ADJUSMENT
SCREWS AND
NUTS Border Screws (x2)
7-15 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374

8. Remove the tension spring.
a. Loosen the three mounting plate bolts
b. Loosen the lock nut of the belt tension adjuster.
c. Remove the adjustment bolt and support bolt, then remove the tension spring.
Illustration 7-13 Belt Tension Adjuster
Support Bolt
Tension Spring
Lock Nut
Adjustment Bolt
Adjuster
Mounting Plate
Axial Belt
Mounting
Plate Bolts
Axial Motor Pulley

Pulley Cover
7-16 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374

9. Left the mounting plate, and then remove the axial drive belt from the axial motor pulley (see illustration 7-13).
10. Remove the axial drive belt from the Gantry.
11. Install the new axial drive belt by referring to steps 10. through 6.
(Properly position the drive belt on and around the Gantry rotational gear ring and axial motor pulley.)
12. Perform the following adjustment and check according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check &
Adjustment.
AZIMUTH BELT TENSION
HSDCD RECEIVER ASSY POSITION
MOVEMENT CHECK
13. Restore the Gantry and the PDU to original configuration.
14. END
7-17 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
7-6 HV CABLE (ANODE / CATHODE)
Special Equipment
• HV Cable (Anode/Cathode)
• Silicone Oil
• Candle Stick HV lead Wrench
• Tie-wraps
• Kim Wipe
CAUTION
BURN/SHOCK HAZARD!
Wait more than five minutes following the last scan before performing the following
procedure.
CAUTION
Wait approximately five minutes after switching OFF the CB1 in the PDU for all capacitors in
the XG Unit to discharge.

1. Preparation:
a. Set the Gantry to the 0° tilt and the HOME position.

b. Remove the PDU front cover by unscrewing its 2 screws.
c. Switch OFF the CB1 breaker in the PDU.
d. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’ and ‘Slip Ring115V’ switches at the rear Gantry base.
e. Remove the front and left maintenance covers.
f. Rotate the Gantry until the x-ray tube reaches the 12 o’clock position.
g. Insert the azimuth lock pin.
7-18 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
7-6 HV CABLE (ANODE/CATHODE) (CONTINUED)

2. Remove the HV cable (Anode/Cathode) as follows:
a. Use the HV lead wrench to loosen the HV cable connector.
b. Remove the cable from the HV Tank.
c. Ground the end of the cable to the Gantry Frame to verify no voltage.
d. Wipe excess oil from the HV cable connector, and out of the HV Tank connector well.
e. Remove the azimuth lock pin, and rotate the Gantry until the x-ray tube reaches the 3 o’clock position.
f. Insert the azimuth lock pin.
g. Use the HV lead wrench to loosen the HV cable connector.
h. Remove the cable from the x-ray tube.
i. Ground the end of the cable to the Gantry frame to verify no voltage.
j. Wipe excess oil from the HV cable connector.
k. Cut the tie-wraps holding the HV cable to the Gantry, and remove the cable from the Gantry.
3. Install the HV cable (Anode/Cathode) as follows:
a. Replenish the HV connector well of the x-ray tube with silicone oil.
b. Insert the HV cable connector into the HV connector well of the x-ray tube.
c. Tighten the HV cable connector with HV lead wrench.
d. Wipe excess oil from the x-ray tube.
e. Remove the azimuth lock pin, and rotate the Gantry until the x-ray tube reaches the 12 o’clock position.
f. Insert the azimuth lock pin.
g. Replenish the well of the HV Tank with silicone oil.
h. Insert the HV cable connector into the well of the HV Tank.
i. Tighten the HV cable connector with HV lead wrench.
j. Wipe excess oil from the HV Tank.
7-19 GANTRY
REV 10 5116374
7-6 HV CABLE (ANODE/CATHODE) (CONTINUED)

4. Retie any tie-wraps which were removed in step 2.
5. Remove the azimuth lock pin, and rotate the Gantry by hand through two complete revolutions.
Check to make sure the HV cable does not catch on any stationary components during each revolu-
tion.
8. Perform the Scan Test according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment, System.
9. END
7-20 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
SECTION 8 - GANTRY ROTATIONAL - III
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
8-1 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
8-1 HSDCD TRANSMITTER ASSY
Special Equipment
• HSDCD Transmitter Assy
NOTICE
HSDCD Transmitter is static sensitive. Before touching the component, attach the wrist
strap to your wrist and to the metal part of the chassis.
2. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’ and ’Slip Ring115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove the rear, right side, and left maintenance covers from the Gantry.
4. Switch ON the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board, and rotate the Gantry until the x-ray
tube reaches the 7 o’clock position by hand, then switch OFF the Service Switch.
5. Switch OFF the ’Table Tilt’ at the Gantry rear base.
6. Disconnect the cable connectors from HSDCD Transmitter assy.
7. Remove the HSDCD Transmitter assy by unscrewing its two screws.
8. Install the new HSDCD Transmitter assy by referring to steps 7. through 6.
9. Fasten with tie-wrap all cable in excess in a bundle.
Illustration 8-1 HSDCD Transmitter - rear view of HSDCD Slipring

HSDCD Transmitter
RF Cables
Screw (x2)
8-2 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
8-1 HSDCD TRANSMITTER ASSY (CONTINUED)

13. Perform Data Transfer Check according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment, Gantry.
15. Switch ON the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’ and ’Slip Ring115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
16. END
8-3 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
8-2 SIGNAL INTERFACE BOARD
Special Equipment
• Signal Interface Board
2. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’, ’Slip Ring115V’ and ’Table Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove the rear, right side, and left maintenance covers from the Gantry.
4. Switch ON the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board, and rotate the Gantry until the x-ray
tube reaches the 7 o’clock position by hand, then switch OFF the Service Switch.
5. Disconnect the cable connector from Signal Interface Board.
6. Remove the Signal Interface Board by unscrewing its seven screws.
7. Install the new Signal Interface Board by referring to steps 5. through 4.
8. END
8-4 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
8-3 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE (DCP - RF XMT)
Special Equipment
• Optical Fiber Cable
• Tie wraps
2. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’ and ’XG Power’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove the front, rear, right side and left maintenance covers.
4. Disconnect the Opt Fiber Cable connector from the DCP Assy.
5. Disconnect the Opt Fiber Cable connector from the HSDCD Transmitter Assy.
6. Cut the tie-wraps holding the cable to the Gantry frame, and remove it from the Gantry.
7. Install the new Optical Fiber Cable by referring steps 6. through 4.
9. END
8-5 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
8-4 HSDCD SLIP RING ASSY
Special Equipment
• Dial Gauge - Slip Ring Replacement Kit (2225481)
• Tie wraps
• Kim Wipe
CAUTION
CAUTION
Exercise caution when working with slip ring components to avoid contact, inhalation, and
ingestion of slip ring brush powder.
Gloves : Large size : 46-194427P400, X-Large size : 46-194427P401
HEPA Vacuum Cleaner : 46-297933P1 to remove brush block powder (dust).
Do not remove gloves near an exposed slip ring. The power inside the glove can
contaminate the ring.

1. Preparation:
a. Remove the PDU front cover by unscrewing its 2 screws.
b. Switch OFF the CB1 and CB5 breakers in the PDU.
c. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
d. Remove the Gantry Rear and both side covers.
8-6 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
8-4 HSDCD SLIP RING ASSY (CONTINUED)
Removing the HSDCD Brush Block Assy

Refer to SECTION 3 - Gantry Stationary II - BRUSH ASSY - HSDCD Brush Block Removal.
1. Remove the brush block assy from the Gantry.
a. Disconnect the cable connector CN1 connected to the signal brush board.
b. Remove the protect cover from the Brush Block Assy by unscrewing its 4 screws.
d. Remove the brush block assy by unscrewing its four (4) Allen screws.
Slip Ring Covers, Cable Protect Covers removal

1. Remove the HSDCD Receiver Cover by unscrewing its 4 screws.
2. Remove all slip ring cover and cover support (see illustration 8-2).
Illustration 8-2 Slip Ring Covers
Slip Ring Assy
Slip Ring Covers
8-7 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374

3. Remove the cable protect cover (x 4) from the slip ring support frame by unscrewing its 2 (x 4) nuts.
Illustration 8-3 Cable Protect Cover
Cable Protect Cover

Slip Ring Support Frame
Slip Ring Assy
8-8 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
Cables and Wires disconnection

1. Disconnect all cable connections and wires on the inside of the Slip ring, including the GND cable.
Illustration 8-4 Cable and Wire Connections
380 480V Power Cables 115V Power Cables

(Black Cable x3) (Blue and Brown)
(6N.m) (6N.m)
GND Cable
(6N.m)
115V Power Cables

(Blue and Brown)
(6N.m) HSDCD Transmitter
Assy (Cable Connec-
tor x2)
Signal I/F Board
(Cable Connector x1)
8-9 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
HSDCD Receiver Assy removal

2. Remove the HSDCD Receiver Assy by unscrewing its two screws. (Illustration 8-5).
Illustration 8-5 HSDCD Receiver removal

M6x12 Screw
and washer (x2)
HSDCD
Receiver
Assy
8-10 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
Removing the HSDCD Slip Ring

1. Switch ON the ’Table/Tilt’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove the Slip Ring assy from the Gantry: (Requires 2 people)
a. Rotate the Gantry by hand until Slip Ring support frame is visible.
b. Remove the mounting bolts from the Gantry.
(Second person: Push against the face of the Slip Ring to hold it in place while your partner removes the
bolts)
c. Rotate the Gantry by hand until another support frame appears.
d. Remove the mounting bolts, and repeat the procedure to remove the a total of 24 mounting bolts.
e. Pull the Slip Ring off the support frame.
Alignment Groove
rotate the tube to Slip Ring Assy

the vertical position
Slip Ring Support Frame
Mounting Bolts
(6N.m)
transmitter
8-11 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
HSDCD Slip Ring Installation
NOTICE
Take care when handling the HSDCD Slip Ring.
Lean the Ring on a cushion, as part of shipping protection, to avoid scratching the PCB
located in the Ring border.
Illustration 8-6 HSDCD Assy Mounting Plate and Spacer

HSDCD Slip Ring
Cushion
8-12 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374

1. Attach two tie wrap bases on the HSDCD Slip Ring, as shown in the Illustration 8-7. These tie wrap bases will
hold the HSDCD Transmitter wires.
2. Attach the two pin jigs on the HSDCD Slip Ring, as shown in the Illustration 8-7 before installing in the Gantry.
Illustration 8-7 Attaching the Pin Jigs and tie wrap bases before installing in the Gantry
Pin jig (x2)
Signal Interface Board
HSDCD tie wrap

Transmitter base (x2)
Assy
8-13 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374

4. Rotate the support frame (main bearing) so that stay aligned with HSDCD Slip Ring as shown in the Illustration
8-8).
Illustration 8-8 HSDCD Slip Ring Position
REAR VIEW
Pin Pin Jig
Tube position
Signal
Interface
Board
Alignment
Support Pin Groove
Frame Inside of the HSDCD
Slip Ring Assy
Pin
HSDCD Transmitter Assy
5. Turn OFF the Service Switch.
NOTICE
Remove the jigs before rotating the Gantry by hand.
8-14 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374

6. Install the HSDCD Slip Ring adjusting the pin jigs into the support frame. (Illustration 8-9).
Illustration 8-9 Installing the HSDCD Slip Ring

Pin Jigs
NOTICE
The HSDCD Transmitter Assy and Signal Interface Board on the inside of the Slip Ring assy
is very sensitive, so handle it with extreme care.
7. Fasten the first two pin jigs on the top in the Suppor Frame.
8. Remove the two pin jigs inserted in the step 2.
10. Fasten the HSDCD Slip Ring by screwing the remaining mounting bolts by rotating the gantry by hand.
11. Replace the two pin jigs by mounting bolts and fasten them.
12. Verify that all 24 mounting bolts that fix the HSDCD Slip Ring are correctely fastened. Torque 6N.m, as shown
in the Illustration 8-4.
13. Reconnect all remaining cables and connectors disconnected in the step 1 of ’Cables and Wires disconnection’
subsection. Use the same screws removed in the mentioned step.
14. Reinstall the cable protect cover (x 4) removed in the step 3 of ’Slip Ring Covers, Cable Protect Covers
removal’.
15. Reconnect the HSDCD Transmitter connector cables.
16. Tie the cable in excess in a bundle with 3 tie-wraps as shown in the Illustration 8-10.
17. Reconnect the cable connector signal CN1 to the signal brush board.
8-15 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
Illustration 8-10 HSDCD Transmitter connectors detail
Tie–wraps
(x3)
Cable in
excess
HSDCD
Transmitter
8-16 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
Checking if the HSDCD Slip Ring is not slantingly installed

1. Check that the slip ring is not slantingly installed;
a. Install the dial indicator onto slip ring track 1 (inner most track), using the attachment tool (see illustration 8-
11).
b. Attach the smooth surface tape (for protectiong) to the tip of the dial indicator pin.
c. Rotate the Gantry by hand and verify that the slip ring must rotate parallel with the Gantry rotation plane
(less than 0.7mm).
d. Repeat the above check for other slip ring track (track 12).
Illustration 8-11 Dial Indicator Attachment
Attachment Tool
Gantry Frame
Slip Ring
Track Barrier
Slip Ring Track 12

Smooth Surface
Tape
Slip Ring Track 1 Dial Indicator

Slip Ring Track
Dial Indicator
8-17 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374

2. Rotate the Gantry by hand and mark the outermost or least recessed area of slip ring. The Brush Block will be
installed in this area. (Installing Brush Block Assy section).
Illustration 8-12 Looking for the least recessed area
Dial Gauge
SIDE VIEW
HSDCD
Slip Ring
Front Rear
least recessed area
8-18 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374

3. Check the radial position of the slip ring so that the center of the slip ring aligns with the Gantry rotation center.
a. Install the dial indicator onto slip ring groove, using the attachment tool (see illustration 8-13).
b. Check that the rotation center of the panel is not out of the Gantry rotation center.
(less than 0.7mm, ignore a RF SOURCE gap and a RF TERMINATION gap on the HSDCD Slip Ring edge)
c. If the radial position of slip ring assy is out of specification, perform the following adjustment according to
the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment.
SLIP RING RADIAL POSITION
Illustration 8-13 Dial Indicator Attachment
Attachment Tool
Gantry Frame
Dial Indicator
Dial Indicator
Slip Ring Groove
Slip Ring Slip Ring Groove
8-19 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
HSDCD Receiver Assy installation

1. Install the HSDCD Receiver Assy on the Mounting Plate. The location of two screw threads in the mounting
plate where the HSDCD Receiver should be mounted are indicated in the llustration 8-14.
2. Loosen, not remove the two M4x12 screws (Horizontal Adjustment), three M6x12 screws and two M4x8 screws
of HSDCD Receiver Assy indicated in the Illustration 8-14.
Illustration 8-14 Loosening the HSDCD Receiver Assy screws

M4x12 Screw M6x12
(x2) (Horizontal Screw and M6x12 Screw
Adjustment) washer (x3) and washer (x2)
HSDCD
Receiver
Assy
M4x8
Screw and
washer (x2)
Gantry.
HSDCD RECEIVER ASSY POSITION.
8-20 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
Block Jig positioning adjustment

2. Rotate the Slip Ring by hand so that the outermost perimeter (marked in the step 2 of Checking if the HSDCD
is not slantingly installed, Illustration 8-12 ) of Slip Ring stay at 9 o’clock position.
3. Install the Block Jig into the Brush Block Base and fasten with 4 screws.
Illustration 8-15 Brush Block Jig

M6x25 Screws (x4)
Block Jig
8-21 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374

4. Pull the Block Jig so that it keeps in contact with outermost face of Slip Ring Track barrier. (Illustration 8-16 and
8-17).
Illustration 8-16 Brush Block Base and Brush Block Support for HSDCD Slip Ring
Block Jig
Illustration 8-17 Brush Block Base and Brush Block Support for HSDCD Slip Ring
Slip Ring Make the Pin in

contact with the
internal face of
pin Slip Ring Track Pin Track Barrier
Slip Ring
Slip Ring
Track Barrier
Block Jig
The internal face of Block Jig must

stay in contact with Slip Ring
Block Jig pin
8-22 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
NOTICE
The Block Jig must be simultaneously in contact with the Slip Ring and its pins in contact
with the Slip Ring Track Barrier before fastening the screws.
5. Fasten the 4 screws, indicated as “A” in the Illustration 8-18, of HSDCD Brush Block Base, where each two of
them located on the top and bottom.
6. Loosen the two “B” screws, indicated in the Illustration 8-18.
Illustration 8-18 Brush Block Jig
A
Screws (x4)
Just Touch
top and bottom the Block Jig
Torque=11.7N.m
C
Screws (x2)
Torque=11.7N.m
B
Screw with
nuts (x2)
Use the special allen wrench

provided in the SR Replace-
ment Kit to fasten the two screws
8-23 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374

7. Certify that the Block Jig keeps in contact with the Slip Ring.
8. Fasten the two screws that holds the Brush Block Base Support into the Brush Block Base using the special
allen wrench provided in the SR Replacement Kit. (“C” of Illustration 8-18)
9. Measure the clearance between the Slip Ring and the Block Jig in four points indicated in the Illustration 8-19
using the 0.1mm thickness gage provided in the SV Tool.
10. Certify that the Pins of Block Jig keeps in contact with the inner Slip Ring Barrier.
11. Screw the two screws with nuts of Brush Block Plate until touching the border of Block Jig as shown as “B” of
Illustration 8-18. These screws will determine the horizontal position of Brush Block.
12. Fasten the nuts until touching the Support Plate (Illustration 8-18).
13. Lock these two screws and nuts with “locktite”.
NOTICE
Keep the screws of Brush Block Plate, used for Brush Block stopper guide firmed (”B” of
Illustration 8-18). Once loosened, the Block Jig positioning must be performed again.
Illustration 8-19 Clearance between the Slip Ring and Block Jig
HSDCD Slip Ring

Slip Ring
less than
0.1 mm
Block Jig
Block Jig Clearance must be

less than 0.1 mm
Note
If the clearance is greater than 0.1mm, loosen all screws fastened in the steps 5 and 8 and then
restart the Block Jig positioning adjustment from the step 3.
14. Remove the Block Jig by unscrewing its 4 screws.
8-24 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
Rubbing the Brush Block before installing
NOTICE
For an eventual brush breakage, check the type and replace it provided in the service tool
kit.
1. Push and free few times the brushes of Brush Block Assy by finger with a kim wipe between the finger and
brush and check whether they glide smoothly into the brush holder.
Illustration 8-20 Checking the worn-out brushes
Brushes
2. Fasten the two guide pins, provided in the Service Tool Kit as shown in the Illustration 8-21.
NOTICE
8-25 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
Brush Block Installation

1. Insert the Guide Pins (x2) in the Brush Block. (Illustration 8-21).
NOTICE
the groove of Slip Ring.
Move the Brush Block always in perpendicular direction in relation with the Slip Ring
surface.
2. Insert the Brush Block Assy in the Pin Jigs. Take care to not to damage the brushes.
Illustration 8-21 Brush Block and guide pins
Guide Pins
8-26 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
Illustration 8-22 HSDCD Brush Block

HSDCD Slip Ring
Guide
Pins HSDCD Brush Block
3. When inserting the Brush Block, certify that the Brushes are positioned in the middle of Slip Ring Track and not
in contact with Slip Ring Barrier.
Illustration 8-23 Certify that the Brushes are in contact with the middle of Slip Ring Track
Slip Ring
Slip Ring Barrier
Slip Ring Track
Brush
Brush Block
8-27 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
NOTICE
the grove of Slip Ring but not on the Slip Ring Track Barrier.
Keep the Brush Block always in parallel with the Slip Ring surface.
4. Push the Brush Block against the Slip Ring and the Brush Block Plate.
5. Fasten the first two M6x35 Allen screws and washers gradually. (Illustration 8-24).
6. Remove the guide pins.
7. Fasten the remaining two Allen screws with washer.
Illustration 8-24 Brush Block Assy install
M6x35 Allen Screw pushing si-

screws (x4) multaneously the
Brush Block
Torque=11.5N.m against the Slip
Ring and the Brush
Block Plate
NOTICE
For an eventual brush breakage, check the type and replace it provided in the service tool
kit.
8-28 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
Clearance check
The objective of this procedure is to obtain a better accuracy by familiarizing yourself the clearance of a determined
thickness before checking the clearance between the Slip Ring and the Brush Block Assy.
Prepare the following measurement tools:
• Shim (Alignment Tool)
• 4.3mm Master Gauge (Alignment Tool)
a. Prepare a 4.3mm shim and insert/remove few times in the Master Gauge groove enough to familiarize this
clearance.
Illustration 8-25 Master Gauge
Master Gauge
Master Gauge
4.3mm shim
8-29 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374

1. Rotate the Slip Ring by hand and check in four points of its revolution the clearance between the Slip Ring and
Brush Block. (Illustration 8-26), as follows:
a. Verify that the clearance is between 3.5mm and 5.7mm.
Illustration 8-26 Tolerated clearance between the Slip Ring and Brush Block
Thickness
gauge
15mm
carry out the

measure 15mm
below the top of
Brush Block
Thickness
gauge
Thickness
gauge
carry out the mea

15mm sure 15mm above
the bottom of
Brush Block
8-30 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
Clearance check (continued)

2. Rotate the Slip Ring by hand and verify visually whether the Brushes goes through at the middle of Slip Ring
Track along its course.
3. If at least one of the steps 1 and 2 is not in accordance with its tolerance, proceed the Brush Block Installation
steps 7 to 1 in reverse order and restart the Block Jig positioning adjustment from step 1.
4. Switch ON the “Table/Tilt” switch at the Gantry rear base.
Illustration 8-27 Tolerated clearance between the Slip Ring and Brush Block
Slip Ring
Slip Ring Barrier
Slip Ring Track
Clearance
Brush
Brush Block
Note
If one of the two steps above does not agree, remove the Brush Block and proceed the Block Jig
positioning adjustment again.
8-31 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
Power and Signal Cables Connection

1. Connect all power cables (including the GND cable) to the power bars, removed in the Removing the HSDCD
Brush Block Assy step 1c.
2. Connect the connector CN1 to its original configuration.
3. Attach the tie wrap bases just about in the locations shown in Illustration 8-27 and 8-28.
Illustration 8-28 Power Cables, GND Cable and Connector CN1

tie wrap and bases (x5)
Power Cables
tie wrap (x1)
Cable Protector
Cover
Connector CN1
tie wrap (x1)
8-32 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374

4. Arrange the cables in excess so that keep closed by the side plate as shown in the Illustration 8-29.
5. Fasten the power and GND cables.
Illustration 8-29 Tie wrap bases location and cabling arrangement
Gantry - Right Side tie wrap and bases (x4)
tie wrap and

bases (x2)
tie wrap and
bases (x4)
tie wrap and

bases (x1)
8-33 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374

6. Tilt the Gantry and verify that the cables does not get tensioned.
7. Arrange the Signal cable CN1 in excess so that keep arranged as shown in the Illustration 8-30.
8. Attach the tie wrap bases.
9. Fasten the Cable CN1 as shown in the Illustration below.
Illustration 8-30 Signal Cable CN1
tie wrap and Brush Block

bases (x4)
CN1
8-34 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
HSDCD Slip Ring Covers Installation

1. Reconnect all disconnected cables.
2. Attach the HSDCD Slip Ring Covers as shown in the Illustration 8-31.
Illustration 8-31 Slip Ring Covers
HSDCD Slip
Ring Assy
Slip Ring Covers
3. Attach the HSDCD Receiver Assy Cover as follows: as shown in the Illustration 8-33.
Note
Before attaching the HSDCD Receiver cover, dispose the RF cables so that between the cables
and mentioned cover exist enough place and certify that after installed the cover, the cables are not
tensioned.
8-35 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
Illustration 8-32 RF cables close by HSDCD Antenna
RF Cables close by
HSDCD Antenna
a. Fasten the HSDCD Receiver Assy Cover with Slip Ring Cover. Use special washers provided in the
Replacement Kit.
b. Fasten the HSDCD Receiver Assy Cover with the HSDCD Receiver Assy.
Illustration 8-33 HSDCD Receiver Assy Cover

HSDCD Receiver Screw (x2)
Assy Cover
Slip Ring Cover
Screw and
special
Washer (x2)
Arrange the
cables
8-36 GANTRY
REV 14 5116374
Functional Check
1. Rotate the Gantry by hand and perform the following checks:
2. Perform the Gantry rotation during approximatelly 10 minutes and verify that there is no irregular noises as
follows:
a. Switch ON the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’, ’Slip Ring115V’ and ’Table Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
b. Switch OFF the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
c. Switch to MNL the SYS Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
d. Switch to FIX the ABT Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
e. Switch to SPD2 the SPD Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
f. Switch to FAST the SW4 Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
g. Switch to CNT the SW5 Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
3. Perform the following checks according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment.
HSDSD SLIP RING ↔ HSDCD BRUSH CONTACT CHECK
DAS TRANSFER TEST
5. END
8-37 GANTRY
blank
8-38 GANTRY
REV 9 5116374
TABLE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 - LCT TABLE (2320315). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 REMOVAL / INSTALLATION OF THE TABLE COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-1-1 Bottom Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-1-2 Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-2 CRADLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-3 CRADLE POTENTIOMETER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-4 CRADLE POTENTIOMETER PULLEY METAL CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-4-3 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-4-4 Remove the Old Cradle Potentiometer Pulley Metal Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-4-5 Install the new Cradle Potentiometer Pulley Metal Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1-5 CRADLE ENCODER ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1-6 HEIGHT POTENTIOMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1-7 STEPPING MOTOR DRIVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
1-8 STEPPING MOTOR ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
1-9 TBL BOARD ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
1-10 TBL CONNECTOR BOARD ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
1-11 POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
1-12 TOUCH SW ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
1-13 LATCH SWITCH ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
1-14 FOOT SWITCH ASSY (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
1-15 TABLE SOLENOID VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
1-16 TABLE HYDRAULIC CYLINDER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
1-17 TABLE PUMP (FILLING) LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
1-17-1 Table Pump (Filling) Minor Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
1-17-2 Table Pump (Filling) Major Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
1-18 TABLE OIL PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
1-19 TABLE PUMP CAPACITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
1-20 FOOT SWITCH (PEDAL AND LARGE MAT TYPE FOOT SWITCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
1-20-1 PEDAL TYPE FOOT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
i TABLE
ii TABLE
REV 18 5116374
SECTION 1 - LCT TABLE (2320315)
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
1-1 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-1 REMOVAL / INSTALLATION OF THE TABLE COVERS
1-1-1 Bottom Cover
Special Equipment
• None
1. Move the cradle OUT to its fully retracted position (farthest from Gantry).
2. Raise the Table to its highest position.
3. Switch OFF the “Table/Tilt” switch at the Gantry rear base.
4. Remove the two screw caps from the rear bottom cover.
5. Unscrew the two screws and remove the rear bottom cover.
6. Remove the four screw covers from foot pedals.
Note
If the Foot Pedal Option is not installed, skip to step 8.
7. Unscrew the four Allen screws and remove the four foot pedals.
8. Remove the four screw caps from the front bottom cover.
9. Unscrew the four screws and remove the front bottom cover.
10. END
Illustration 1-1 Table front and rear Bottom Covers
Screw Cover
Foot Pedal
Screw Caps
Rear Bottom Cover
Front Bottom Cover
1-2 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-1-2 Top Cover
Special Equipment
• None
1. Switch OFF the “XG Power” and “Rotate” switches, and switch ON the “Table/Tilt” switch at the Gantry rear
base.
2. Set the Table to its highest position.
5. Unscrew and remove the top cover(left or right) bottom holding screws. The Illustration 1-2 shows the screw
locations.
6. Slide the top cover (left or right) free from the Table until the latch and touch sensor switch connectors are
visible.
7. Disconnect the latch switch and touch sensor switch cable connectors.
8. Remove the top cover (left or right).
9. END
1-3 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-1-2 Top Cover (continued)
Illustration 1-2 Top Cover
Touch Sensor Connector

Top Cover R
Screw Location
Top Cover L
Latch Switch
Connector
1-4 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-2 CRADLE
Special Equipment
• None
base.
5. Remove the screw cap and unscrew the four Allen screws from the cradle end (see Illustration 1-3), and then
slide out the cradle.
6. After installing the new cradle, perform the adjustment according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check &
Adjustment.
Gap Between Cradle and Cradle Support
7. END
Illustration 1-3 Cradle End
Cradle
Allen Screws
with Screw Caps
1-5 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-3 CRADLE POTENTIOMETER
Special Equipment
• Cradle Potentiometer
• Tie wraps
1. Switch OFF the ”XG” and ”Rotate” switches, and switch ON the ”Table/Tilt” switch on the Gantry rear base.
4. Switch OFF the ”Table/Tilt” switch on the rear base of the Gantry.
5. Remove the Cradle. Refer to section 1-2.
6. Remove the right top cover. Refer to section 1-1-2
7. Remove both bottom covers. Refer to section 1-1-1.
8. Remove the cover which is located under the cradle closest to the Gantry (8 screws).
9. Remove the front cradle tray (4 screws), rear cradle tray (6 screws).
10. Remove the driver cover by unscrewing 4 screws. Its location is shown in the illustraion 1-24.
11. Remove the TABLE BOARD ASSY protective cover (4 screws). Its location is shown in the Illustration 1-4.
1-6 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-3 CRADLE POTENTIOMETER (CONTINUED)
Illustration 1-4 TABLE BOARD ASSY LOCATION
TABLE BOARD ASSY

GANTRY
TABLE
DRIVER
SIDE VIEW
TABLE BOARD ASSY LOCATION

ILLUSTRATION 1-1
12. Disconnect connector CN3 from the TABLE BOARD ASSY. After replacement, wrap up the remaining cable
as it before.
13. Verify that the end of the cradle is in the out limit position, then loosen the two screws closest to the
Potentiometer. Refer to Illustrations 1-5 and 1-6.
Note
Be careful not to move the thin cradle potentiometer cable.
Illustration 1-5 POTENTIOMETER LOCATION
1-7 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
Illustration 1-6 CRADLE POTENTIOMETER
1
2
3
4
CN3 Support screw
measure resistance
between
Disk
PIN2 and PIN3
Potentiometer
Support bracket
Set Nut
Gear
Coupling Screws
14. Remove the support bracket together with the Potentiometer Assy, with its wires still attached, by unscrewing
the support screws shown in illustration 1-6 and then feeding connector CN3 up through the table.
15. Unscrew the coupling screws in the gear together with the potentiometer assembly to remove the gear.
16. Remove the set nut and transfer the support bracket to the new cradle potentiometer. Tighten the bracket in
place using the set nut.
17. Install the gear to the potentiometer assembly and tighten the coupling screws.
18. Feed the wiring of the new Potentiometer down to the TABLE BOARD ASSY, retie any tie wraps which were
removed in step 13.
19. Install the new potentiometer/support bracket, and tighten the support screws.
1-8 TABLE
REV 18 5116374

20. Adjust the Potentiometer so that the resistance between Pin 2 and Pin 3 of CN3 is 125Ω +/-50Ω. Then tighten
the two coupling screws (Illustration 1-6).
Note
It may be difficult to access one of the coupling screws after adjusting the potentiometer. If this is
the case, then tighten the accessible coupling screw and move the cradle sightly forward toward
the Gantry. Tighten the second coupling screw and then return the cradle handle to its mechanical
outer limit.
21. Verify that the resistance between Pin 2 and Pin 3 of CN3 is still 125Ω +/-50Ω. If it is not then repeat step 17.
22. Perform steps 11 through 5 in their reverse order.
23. Perform a P0, PG longitudinal adjustment. (Refer to Functional Check & Adjustment, Table, Longitudinal
Function, Cradle Absolute Position.)
24. END
1-9 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-4 CRADLE POTENTIOMETER PULLEY METAL CABLE
Special Equipment
• Cradle Potentiometer Pulley Cable: U0008AP
• Metal Tube: U0009AP (Two tubes must be ordered.)
Illustration 1-7 Metal Cable and Metal Tubes

Metal Cable (6m) Metal Tube (x2)
1-4-1 Preparation
1. Understand and follow the Safety Guidelines Manual.
base.
6. Remove the following covers and components from the Table: (See Illustration 1-8)
• Cradle ...................................................... Four(4) Allen Screws
• Top Cover (Rear / Left / Right) .......................................................3 x Four(4) Screws
• Drive Cover ....................................................... Four(4) Screws
• Cradle Tray (Front / Rear) ....................................................... Four(4) Screws / Six(6) Screws
1-10 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
Illustration 1-8 Remove Covers and Components

Left Side View
Top Cover_Left Top Cover_Rear
Top View
Drive Cover Cradle Tray_Rear Top Cover_Right
Cradle Tray_Front
1-4-2 Remove the Old Cradle Potentiometer Pulley Metal Cable

1. Cut the Cradle Potentiometer Pulley Metal Cable at any position and remove it from the table.
Illustration 1-9 Cradle Potentiometer Pulley Metal Cable
Cradle Potentiometer
Pulley Metal Cable
Table Frame
2. Remove the Cradle Carriage from the Table.

3. Loosen the two screws fixed the Potentiometer Assy.
1-11 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-4-2 Remove the Old Cradle Potentiometer Pulley Metal Cable (Continued)
4. Remove the Pulley Assy from the bracket by unscrewing its two screws.
Illustration 1-10 Remove the Pulley
Pulley
Bracket
Screw (x2)
5. Loosen the lock nut , then loose the adjusting nut to loosen the cable tensioner.
Illustration 1-11 Loosen the Cable Tensioner
Lock Nut
Tensioner Adjusting Nut
1-12 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-4-3 Install the new Cradle Potentiometer Pulley Metal Cable

1. Pass the Cradle Potentiometer Pulley Metal Cable through the hole of the pulley shown as Illustration 1-12.
2. Pass the metal cable through the metal tube twice shown as below Illustration 1-12.
3. Squeeze the metal tube using a plier to fix the metal cable.
Illustration 1-12 Pass the Metal Cable through the Metal Tube
Note: This is a sketch map, it is not consistent with actual instance.
Metal Cable
Metal Tube Pass the metal cable through

the metal tube twice.
4. Strain the metal cable to wind it 8 times clockwise (CW) around the upper side of the pulley.
Illustration 1-13 Wind the Metal Cable 8 circles CW
Note: The eight (8) circles metal cable don’t wrap each other.
Wind the metal

cable 8 circles CW
5. Attach a tape to prevent wrapping the metal cable.

6. Continue to randomly wind the rest of the metal cable clockwise to the pulley, then attach a tape to prevent
loosening the metal cable during installation.
1-13 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-4-3 Install the new Cradle Potentiometer Pulley Metal Cable (Continued)
7. Re-install the Pulley Assy to the bracket by screwing its two screws.
Illustration 1-14 Re-install the Pulley Assy

Tape: Prevent loosening
the metal cable
Tape: Prevent wrapping

the metal cable
Bracket
8. Separate the gears of the Potentiometer Assy and the Pulley Assy, then turn gear of the Potentiometer Assy
counterclockwise (CCW) to its utmost position. (See Illustration 1-15)
Illustration 1-15 Gear of the Potentiometer Assy Rotation Direction

Top View
CCW
Bracket
Pulley Hole points the Pot Potentiometer
9. Turn the Pulley to let holes on the pulley point at the Potentiometer Assy.
10. Move the potentiometer Assy close to the Pulley Assy, let the teeth on the two gears mesh as they turn round.
11. Tear the tapes and start to wrap the metal cable shown as below Illustration 1-16.
NOTICE
At this time, the metal cable totals 74/3 circles on the pulley.
CAUTION
Strain the Cradle potentiometer Pulley Metal Cable During wrapping it, but avoid excessive
strength to snap the metal cable.
1-14 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
12. When the metal cable return the start position, then wind it 11/4 circles clockwise (CW) around the upper side
of the pulley.
NOTICE
At this time, the metal cable totals 9 circles on the pulley.
Illustration 1-16 Wrap the Metal Cable

4
End position
Start Position
1 3
2
Cradle Potentiometer
Pulley Metal Cable
Table Frame
The Cradle Potentiometer Pulley Metal Cable

Wrap direction of the metal cable
13. Pass the metal cable through the holes of the pulley and shaft shown as below Illustration 1-17.
14. Pass the metal cable through the metal tube twice shown as below Illustration 1-17.
15. Squeeze the metal tube using a plier to fix the metal cable. (See Illustration 1-18)
Illustration 1-17 Pass the Metal Cable through pulley, shaft and metal tube
Metal Tube
Holes of Pulley
Shaft
Pulley
1-15 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
Illustration 1-18 Fix the Metal Cable
16. Separate the gears of the Potentiometer Assy and the Pulley Assy.
17. Turn the pulley:
• Turn the pulley 1/4 circle counterclockwise (CCW).
• Turn the pulley 9 circles clockwise (CW).
• Turn the pulley 1/4 circle counterclockwise (CCW).
18. The holes on the pulley point at direction of the Gantry after turning the pulley.
19. Install the Cradle Carriage and slide it to the end of the rail shown as below Illustration.
Illustration 1-19 Install the Cradle Carriage

Cradle Carriage
Slide Rail
Cradle Carriage
Slide Direction
1-16 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
20. Pinch the cable holder on the Cradle Carriage and the metal cable to move together about 25cm forward.
Illustration 1-20 Remove the cable holder and metal cable together
Cradle Carriage
Cable Holder
21. Adjust the screw shown in white circle (See Illustration 1-21) to loosen the metal cable.
Illustration 1-21 Screw Adjustment
22. Fix the metal cable onto the cable holder as shown.
Illustration 1-22 Fix the Metal Cable to Cable Holder
Cable Holder
1-17 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
23. Adjust the screw shown in white circle (See Illustration 1-21) to little strain the metal cable.
24. Adjust the lock nut and adjusting nut to adjust the metal cable strain, until the distance between the bracket
and spring is 1mm.
CAUTION
Avoid excessive adjustment to snap the metal cable.
25. Verify that the end of the cradle is in the out limit position.
26. Turn gear of the Potentiometer Assy to adjust the Potentiometer so that the resistance between Pin 2 and Pin
3 of CN3 is 125Ω ± 50Ω. (Refer to Illustration 1-23)
Illustration 1-23 Measure resistance of the Potentiometer
1
2
3
4
CN3
measure resistance
between
PIN2 and PIN3
Potentiometer
Gear
27. Move the potentiometer Assy close to the Pulley Assy, let the teeth on the two gears mesh as they turn round.
28. Fix the Potentiometer Assy by screwing its two screws.
29. Reinstall the removed components and covers in the reverse order of removal.
30. Restore the Table to original configuration.
31. Perform a P0, PG longitudinal adjustment.
Refer to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment.
CRADLE ABSOLUTE POSITION
Longitudinal Function
32. END
1-18 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-5 CRADLE ENCODER ASSY
Special Equipment
• Cradle Encoder Assy
• Tie wraps
base.
4. Remove the following cover and component from the Table:
• Cradle . . . . . . Refer to Cradle
• Top Cover (Both Side) . . . . . . Refer to Top Cover
• Drive Cover . . . . . . Four(4) Screws
Illustration 1-24 Table
Driver Cover
Cradle
1-19 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-5 CRADLE ENCODER ASSY (CONTINUED)

5. Disconnect the cable connector leading from the encoder.
6. Loosen the set screw, then remove the encoder disk from the encoder shaft.
7. Remove the encoder assy from the encoder holder by unscrewing its 3 screws.
8. Install the new encoder assy by referring to steps 7 through 5.
CRADLE RELATIVE POSITION
Longitudinal Accuracy
Cradle Repeatability
11. END
Illustration 1-25 Cradle Pulley Removal
Encoder Assy
Cable Connector
Encoder Disk
Encoder Holder
Set Screw
1-20 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-6 HEIGHT POTENTIOMETER
Special Equipment
• Height Potentiometer
• Tie wraps
• Grease
Note
It may be necessary to lower the Table to gain access to one of the height potentiometer coupling
screws. If this is done then be sure to return the Table to its highest position, and return the Gantry
“Table/Tilt” switch to the OFF position.
base.
2. Remove Left Cover by unscrewing 4 screws.
3. Move the Cradle out to its fully retracted position (farthest from Gantry).
4. Lower the Table to the mechanical down limit position.
6. Remove the left side maintenance cover from the Gantry.
7. Remove the following covers and component from the Table:
• Top Cover-L Refer to Top Cover
• Cradle Refer to Cradle
• Rear Cradle Tray Six(6) Screws
1-21 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-6 HEIGHT POTENTIOMETER (CONTINUED)

8. Replace the Height Potentiometer as follows:
a. Loosen the two coupling set screws.
b. Remove the Potentiometer Assy together with its bracket .
c. Disconnect the connector CN5 from the TBL CON BD Assy and feed it up through the Table.
d. Remove the Height Potentiometer assy from the bracket, and mount the new Potentiometer Assy onto the
old bracket.
e. Install the new Height Potentiometer/bracket Assy to the Table left side frame.
f. Apply grease to the potentiometer shaft if necessary.
g. Feed the wiring of the new Potentiometer to the TBL CON BD Assy and retie all the tie-wraps which were
removed in step 6c. and 6d.
h. Connect the new CN5 connector to the TBL CON BD Assy.
Illustration 1-26 Height Potentiometer
To Gantry
Table Left side Frame
Bracket
Coupling Set Screws
Potentiometer Nut Plate Support Nuts (2)

Height Potentiometer
TABLE TOP VIEW
Height Potentiometer
Plate Support Nuts
To Gantry
BRACKET SIDE VIEW
1-22 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-6 HEIGHT POTENTIOMETER (CONTINUED)

9. Adjust the Height Potentiometer as follows:
a. Switch OFF the “Table/Tilt” switch at the Gantry rear base.
b. Set the T3 (interlock release) and T6 switch of the TGP S1 dip-switch to ON position.
c. Down the table to its mechanical down limit position
d. Push TEST1 switch on the TGP board so that the height display on the Gantry Display reads 011.
e. Adjust the potentiometer so that the position display reads 91 ± 5.
Note
Adjust the Height Potentiometer value by turning the potentiometerís shaft with a trimmer adjuster/
tweaker (small slotted screw driver). It can be accessed through the hole in the left side cover as
shown in illustration 1-27.
f. Tighten the two coupling set screws.
g. Set the T3 and T6 switches of the TGP S1 dip-switch to OFF position.
10. Perform the following adjustment according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment.
H0, HG HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
12. END
Illustration 1-27 Height Potentiometer Adjustment
use this hole to adjust

the potentiometer
1-23 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-7 STEPPING MOTOR DRIVER
Special Equipment
• Stepping Motor Driver Assy
• Tie-wraps
4. Disconnect the three cable connectors (CN1 ∼ CN3) and Ground Cable from the Stepping Motor Driver Assy.
5. Remove the Stepping Motor Driver Assy by unscrewing its two screws.
6. Install the new Stepping Motor Driver Assy by referring to steps 6. through 5.
7. For output torque adjustment, refer to Functional Check/Adjustment Manual (See Section 5 in Table Gantry
Parts).
9. END
1-24 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-8 STEPPING MOTOR ASSY
Special Equipment
• Stepping Motor Assy
• Tie-wraps
4. Remove the following covers and component from the Table:
• Top Cover L Refer to Top Cover
Illustration 1-28 Stepping Motor Location
Cradle
Stepping Motor
1-25 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-8 STEPPING MOTOR ASSY (CONTINUED)

5. Disconnect the cable connector (CN37) leading from the Stepping Motor Assy.
6. Loosen the four screws that fasten the motor support bracket to the Table frame, to relieve the belt tension.
7. Remove the four screws that fasten the stepping motor to the motor support bracket, and remove the drive belt
from the stepping motor pulley, and slide stepping motor out of the motor support bracket.
8. Remove the stepping motor pulley from the stepping motor shaft by loosening the set screw, and transfer the
pulley to the new stepping motor.
9. Install the new stepping motor by referring to steps 7 through 5.
11. END
Illustration 1-29 Stepping Motor Assy
Bearing
Roller Potentiometer Assembly
Cradle Encoder
Pulley
Motor Support
Belt
Step Motor
1-26 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-9 TBL BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• TBL Board Assy
• Tie-wraps
4. Remove the following covers from the Table:
• Rear Bottom Cover Refer to Bottom Cover
• Front Bottom Cover Refer to Bottom Cover
5. Disconnect the all cable connectors (CN1 ∼ CN9) from the TBL Board Assy.
6. Remove the TBL Board Assy by unscrewing its four screws.
7. Install the new TBL Board Assy by referring to steps 6 through 5.
9. END
Illustration 1-30 TBL Board Location
TBL Board
1-27 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-10 TBL CONNECTOR BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• TBL Connector Board Assy
• Tie-wraps
4. Push the cradle to IN max (closest to the Gantry).
5. Remove the rear tray under the cradle.
6. Disconnect the all cable connectors from the TBL Connector Board Assy.
7. Remove the TBL Connector Board Assy by unscrewing its four screws.
8. Install the new TBL Connector Board Assy by referring to steps 6 through 5.
10. END
Illustration 1-31 TBL Connector Board Location
TBL Connector
Board
1-28 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-11 POWER SUPPLY
Special Equipment
• Power Supply Assy
• Tie-wraps
4. Remove the following cover from the Table:
5. Pop free and remove the plastic guard from the front of the power supply terminals.
7. Remove the Power Supply by unscrewing its four side support screws.
8. Install the new Power Supply by referring to steps 7 through 5.
10. END
Illustration 1-32 Power Supply
1-29 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-12 TOUCH SW ASSY
Special Equipment
• Touch SW Assy
• Top Cover R / L Refer to Top Cover
5. Remove the Touch SW1 Assy from the Table R/L top cover.
6. Thread the Touch SW cable connector through the cable hole in the Table top cover, and attach the new Touch
SW Assy to the Table top cover.
8. Verify that Touch SW Assy is operating normally.
9. END
Illustration 1-33 Touch SW Assy Location
Touch SW Assy
1-30 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-13 LATCH SWITCH ASSY
Special Equipment
• Latch Switch Assy
• Tie-wraps
• Top Cover R / L Refer to Top Cover
5. Push the release tab, and firmly pull the switch away from the Table cover.
6. Unscrew the ring nut, and remove the button cover from the Table cover.
7. Install the new Latch Switch Assy by referring to steps 6 through 5.
9. END
Illustration 1-34 Latch Switch Assy
Release Tab
Latch Switch
Button Cover Ring Nut
1-31 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-14 FOOT SWITCH ASSY (OPTION)
Special Equipment
• Foot Switch Assy
• Tie-wraps
• Front Bottom Cover Refer to Bottom Cover
• Protect Cover Three(3) Screws
5. Disconnect the four wires from the Foot Switch Assy.
6. Remove the Foot Switch Assy by unscrewing its six screws.
7. Install the new Foot Switch Assy by referring to steps 6 through 5.
9. END
Illustration 1-35 Foot Switch Assy
Screw (x6)
Spacer
Foot Switch Assy
1-32 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-15 TABLE SOLENOID VALVE
Special Equipment
• Table Solenoid Valve
• Support Tool (2212864)
• Oil (Z9807QD)
• Sealing Tape
• Tie-wraps
• Kim wipe
WARNING
CRASH HAZARD!
THE TABLE MUST BE SUPPORTED USING THE SUPPORT TOOL AS DESCRIBED BELOW
WHEN CHANGING THE SOLENOID VALVE.
1. Remove the following covers and component:
• Top Covers (Left and Right side) Refer to Top Cover
• Cradle Tray Six(6) Screws
• Bottom Covers (front and bottom) Refer to BOTTOM COVER
NOTICE
VOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE!
Do not forget to switch OFF the T3 Table Dip switch, other wise here will be collision hazard,
since the interlock function does not word, if T3 is set to ON.
1-33 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-15 TABLE SOLENOID VALVE (CONTINUED)

2. For systems where the Table lowest height is set to 400 mm (Normal Setting), lower the Table to its lower
mechanical limit position.
a. If the Table can not be lowered down to mechanical limit position due to the interlock function, switch ON
(up) the T3 Table dip switch to disable the interlock function, and continue to lower the Table. In this case,
be careful not to have the Table collide against anything (including the Table mechanical limit).
For systems where the Table lowest height is set to 650 mm (Compact Siting Mode or short foot print mode),
attach the support tool as follows:
Note
When using the support tool, the adjuster should be partially extended, about 5cm, before
supporting the Table.
b. Assemble the Table Support Tool.
c. Attach the support tool to the undersurface of the Table on the side farthest from the Gantry using the four
bolts currently screwed into the bottom of the Frame. Lower the Table onto the support.
d. Switch OFF the ’Table/Tilt’ switch at the rear Gantry base.
Illustration 1-36 Table Support Tool
(FRONT VIEW)
Frame
Support Tool
Adjuster
leg of the support tool
adjuster
bolts(4)
1-34 TABLE
REV 18 5116374

3. Remove the solenoid valve as follows:
a. Disconnect the power wire connector leading from the solenoid valve.
b. Slightly loosen the set and tightening nuts securing the high pressure hoses, then disconnect the high
pressure hose.
c. Loosen the set and tightening nuts and disconnect the return hose.
Illustration 1-37 Table Solenoid
Flow Adjuster solenoid valve

Elbow Joint
Elbow Joint Set Nut
Tightening
Nut
Flow Control Valve
Set Nut
High Pressure Hose

Return Hose
to Power Line Connector
Cylinder
1-35 TABLE
REV 18 5116374

d. Remove the solenoid valve from the elbow joint on flow control valve by turning it CCW.
Note
When wrapping sealing tape around end joints, wrap the tape in the opposite direction of the
threads (about one and half turns).
e. Remove the elbow joint from the solenoid valve and attache it to the new solenoid valve using sealing tape.
f. Install the new solenoid valve assy to the elbow joint on the flow control valve.
g. Attach the high pressure hose and return hose to the new solenoid valve (see illustration 1-38).
h. Connect the power wire connector and cover it with oil-proof tube.
i. Adjust the flow adjuster by turning it fully CW and then two full turns CCW.
j. Tighten all nuts and retie any wraps which have been removed.
Illustration 1-38 Table Solenoid Replacement
Elbow Joint Elbow Joint
Flow Control Valve
Old Solenoid Valve

Flow Adjuster
Set Nut
Elbow Joint Elbow Joint
New Solenoid Valve
Power Line Connector
Flow Control Valve
Oil-Proof Tube
1-36 TABLE
REV 18 5116374

4. Loosen the adjuster of the support tool and carefully remove the support tool from under the table.
5. Switch ON the ’Table/Tilt’ switch at the rear Gantry base.
6. Lower the Table and verify that the all movement is smooth and normal.
CAUTION
CRASH HAZARD.
Do not move the Table upwards after replacing the magnetic flow valve until it has been
lowered first; this will feed unwanted air into the valve.
7. Move the Table up and verify that it is operating normally. If there is a shortage of oil (the Table will not rise to
its normal limit), add more oil by referring to TABLE POMP MINOR LUBRICATION.
8. Move the Table up and down a few times to remove the air from the hydraulic system. Make sure that all the
air inside is removed. To verify it, the Table moves smoothly when the air inside is removed.
10. END
Illustration 1-39 Table Support Tool Removal
1-37 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-16 TABLE HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
Special Equipment
• Table Hydraulic Cylinder
• Support Tool (2212864)
• Oil (Z9807QD)
• Sealing Tape
• Tie-wraps
• Kim wipe
WARNING
CRASH HAZARD!
DO NOT REMOVE THE CYLINDER WITHOUT REMOVING THE UPPER STRUCTURAL
SUPPORT, UPPER SUPPORT, AND U-COLUMN FIRST.
THE TABLE MUST BE SUPPORTED USING THE SUPPORT TOOL AS DESCRIBED IN 1-15.
Note
If the maximum height can not be achieved then it will be more difficult to lubricate the pump
following replacement of the cylinder. The maximum height is approximately 1000mm measured
from the Table frame to the lowest point of the cradle top surface.
• Top Covers (Left and Right side) Refer to Top Cover
• Rear Cover Four(4) Screws
• Side covers (left and right side Two(2)X2 Screws
• Bottom Covers (front and rear) Refer to BOTTOM COVER
1-38 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-16 TABLE HYDRAULIC CYLINDER (CONTINUED)

2. Attach the support tool as follows (see illustration 1-36):
Note
When using the support tool, the adjuster should be partially extended, about 5cm, before
supporting the Table.
a. Assemble the Table Support Tool.
leg of the support tool
adjuster
bolts(4)
b. Attach the support tool to the undersurface of the Table on the side farthest from the Gantry using the four
bolts currently screwed into the bottom of the Frame. Lower the Table onto the support.
c. Switch OFF the ’TableTilt’ switch at the rear Gantry base.
3. Disengage the upper blocks from the outer arm by unscrewing six support bolts.
Illustration 1-40 Cylinder/Outer Arm Removal
Upper Shaft Upper Block
Hex Bolts(6)
Outer Arm
Cylindar
Inner Arm
1-39 TABLE
REV 18 5116374

4. Remove the oil return hose from the hydraulic cylinder
5. Remove the solenoid valve from the cylinder.
6. Remove the flow control valve from the old cylinder, then attach to the new cylinder using sealing tape.
Verify that the flow control valve should be at an angle of approximately 0° to the cylinder.
7. Attach the solenoid valve to the new cylinder.
8. Attach the return hose to the new cylinder.
Illustration 1-41 Removal/Attachment of the Flow Control Valve and the Solenoid Valve
: Remove or Attach
Solenoid Valve
High Pressure Hose
Return Hose
Flow Control Valve

Return Hose
Cylinder
Rod End
A
1-40 TABLE
REV 18 5116374

9. Remove the side cover (2303534,2303535) and the side cover support down 2296669.
10. Remove the lower shaft and slide it out of the exposed side hole.
11. Remove the rod and the cylinder together.
12. Measure the distance ’B’ : between the rod end and the rod base of the old cylinder.
13. Adjust the new rod to the same distance, ’B’, as the old rod.
14. Install the new rod and cylinder using the lower shaft. Tighten the lower shaft into place.
15. Return the low side cover support to the side support and screw it into place.
Illustration 1-42 Metal Hole Guard and Lower Shaft
(RIGHT SIDE VIEW) (FRONT VIEW)
Lower Shaft
SIde Cover Sup Dow
Hole Guard Cylinder
Rod End
Lower Shaft
Nut
B Screw
Shaft Support
1-41 TABLE
REV 18 5116374

16. Verify that all piping and hosing is in the proper configuration and will not catch.
17. Add oil to the pump by referring to the following section:
Initial Table Height Prior to

Refer to ...
Replacement
TABLE PUMP MINOR LUBRICATION
Maximum
(fully extended) When oiling the pump, the initial amount of oil poured into the pump should be
approximately 140 milliliters.
TABLE PUMP MAJOR LUBRICATION
Less than Maximum When oiling the pump, the initial amount of oil poured into the pump should be
approximately 50 milliliters for every 10mm that the rod could not be extended (for
every 10mm below the 255mm maximum rod extension ‘A’ in the illustration 1-41.
18. Loosen the adjuster of the support tool and carefully remove the support tool from under the table.
19. Raise and lower the Table repeatedly and Check the following:
a. Verify that the solenoid valve and U-Column surface is parallel.
b. Verify that the hosing does not catch or pull excessively.
21. END
Illustration 1-43 Solenoid Valve Configuration
U–Column
Cylinder
Solenoid Valve
1-42 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-17 TABLE PUMP (FILLING) LUBRICATION
1-17-1 Table Pump (Filling) Minor Lubrication
Special Equipment
• Oil (Z9807QD)
• Sealing Tape
• Kim wipe
Note
This procedure is to be used for adding small amounts of oil to the pump only (no more than 0.15
liters). Use the instructions in the TABLE PUMP MAJOR LUBRICATION. for the addition of larger
amounts of oil such as those needed after replacing the hydraulic cylinder, or after replacing the
pump while the Table height is below maximum.
• Cradle Refer to CRADLE
2. Remove the small air escape screw and the larger pouring mouth screw from the pump.
3. Pour the estimated required amount of oil into the pump, not more than 0.15 liters.
4. Lower the Table and watch the pump to see if excess oil spills out of the of the pump. If oil leaks out of the
pump holes then continue to lower the Table slowly while wiping up any oil which spills out of the pump.
5. Verify that the Table can rise to its maximum height of approximately 900mm measured from the Table frame
to the lowest point of the cradle top surface, and that all movement is smooth and normal.
6. Return the small air escape screw and the larger pouring mouth screw using sealing tape. Wrap the sealing
tape about one and a half times in the opposite direction of the threads.
8. END
Illustration 1-44 Oil Pump
Pouring Mouth
(Large)
Air Escape Screw

(Small)
1-43 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-17-2 Table Pump (Filling) Major Lubrication
Special Equipment
• Oil (Z9807QD)
• Sealing Tape
• Tie-wraps
• Kim wipe
Note
This procedure is for the addition of amounts of oil such as those needed after replacing the
hydraulic cylinder, or after replacing the pump while the Table height is below maximum. For adding
small amounts of oil to the pump refer to the TABLE PUMP MINOR LUBRICATION.
2. Move the Table to its lowest position.
3. Tilt the Gantry to backward position.
4. Remove the small air escape screw and the large pouring mouth screw from the pump (see illustration 1-29).
5. Pour the estimated required, lost, amount of oil into the pump.
Note
The total pump capacity is 1.25 liters and the total Table system capacity is 1.4 liters.
6. Verify that the Table can rise to its maximum height of approximately 900mm measured from the Table frame
to the lowest point of the cradles top surface, and that all movement is smooth and normal.
7. Continue to repeat steps 5 and 4 until no air is left in the cylinder or oil hoses. The Table moves smoothly when
the air inside is removed.
8. Return the small sir escape screw and the larger pouring mouth screw using sealing tape. Wrap the sealing
tape about one and half times in the opposite direction of the threads.
10. END
1-44 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-18 TABLE OIL PUMP
Special Equipment
• Table Oil Pump
• DVM (Digital Volt Meter)
• Oil (Z9807QD)
• Sealing Tape
• Tie wrap
• Kim Wipe
This CT system contains one oil pump only for Gantry tilt and Table elevation, which is located at the table column.
Therefore, both of the hydraulic systems for Gantry tilt and Table elevation are jointed by the couplers. Refer to ’CT/
e, CT ProSpeed AI/FI Theory Manual, Table/Gantry TAB, Section 3-3 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FOR GANTRY TILT
/ TABLE ELEVATION’.
2. Tilt the Gantry to forward position.
Note
The maximum height is approximately 900mm measured from the Table frame to the lowest point
of the cradles top surface.
4. Switch OFF the ‘Table/Tilt’ switch at the rear Gantry base.
1-45 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-18 TABLE OIL PUMP (CONTINUED)

5. Disconnect the power connector from the oil pump.
6. Disconnect the 4-line connector leading from the Gantry to the pump capacitor.
7. Measure the resistance across the terminals of the pump capacitor using a DVM. If the resistance increases,
the capacitor should be functional. If the resistance is zero or infinite, the capacitor is melted down or shorted
open. In this case replace the TABLE PUMP CAPACITOR.
Note
If you have replaced the Table pump capacitor, maybe the pump need no replacement. Check to
see if the pump is operational after replacing the capacitor.
CAUTION
CRASH HAZARD.
Do not modify the adjustments of Valve and handle its peripheral hoses with care.
Illustration 1-45 Table Pump / Capacitor Connections
Capacitor
Pump
1-46 TABLE
REV 18 5116374

8. Disconnect the GND cable from the oil pump.
9. Disconnect hose nuts shown in illustration 1-29. A small amount of oil may leak out, but this is acceptable.
10. Transfer the hose joints from the old pump to the new one.
11. Remove the pump assy by unscrewing the four Nuts holding it to the Table base.
12. Remove the pump base by unscrewing the four screws, and transfer the pump base to the new pump.
13. Install the new oil pump assy by referring to steps 11 through 4.
Verify that the hose configuration is correct.
Illustration 1-46 Table Oil Pump
To Valve
Nut
To Gantry
Nut and Joint
To Cylinder
Mounting Nuts
1-47 TABLE
REV 18 5116374

14. Add oil to the pump by referring to the following section:
Initial Table Height Prior to

Refer to ...
Replacement
TABLE PUMP MINOR LUBRICATION
Maximum
(fully extended) When oiling the pump, the initial amount of oil poured into the pump should be
approximately 140 milliliters.
TABLE PUMP MAJOR LUBRICATION
Less than Maximum When oiling the pump, the initial amount of oil poured into the pump should be
approximately 50 milliliters for every 10mm that the rod could not be extended (for
every 10mm below the 255mm maximum rod extension ‘A’ in the illustration .1-41.
15. Lower the Table to its lower limit position.

17. Repeat steps 14 and 15 a few times to remove all the air in the cylinder (the Table moves smoothly when the
air inside is removed). Stop this procedure at the Table upper limit position.
19. END
1-48 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-19 TABLE PUMP CAPACITOR
Special Equipment
• Table Pump Capacitor Assy (with connectors)
• Tie wraps
3. Switch OFF the ‘Table/Tilt’ switch at the rear Gantry base.
4. Remove the capacitor from the capacitor plate by loosing the holding screw (see illustration 1-45).
5. Disconnect the power line connector leading to the pump.
6. Disconnect the 4-line connector leading into the Gantry from the pump capacitor.
7. Follow the black and white wires from the four wire connectors up through the Table U-column to where they
meet their upper connector. This will require cutting the tie wraps leading up through the U-column.
8. Install the new capacitor to the capacitor plate and tighten the holding screw.
9. Connect the pump power connector.
10. Tie up the loose wires with tie wraps.
11. Verify that the Table moves up and down normally.
13. END
1-49 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-20 FOOT SWITCH (PEDAL AND LARGE MAT TYPE FOOT SWITCH)
This subsection describes the procedure of the followings foot switches replacements:
• Pedal Type to Pedal Type Foot Switch (1-19-5);
1-20-1 PEDAL TYPE FOOT SWITCH

This subsection describes the procedure of the followings foot switches replacements:
Right Side Pedal Type Foot Switch
Special Equipment
• Pedal Type Foot Switch
• Tie wraps
1. Move the Cradle to the out limit position. (farthest from Gantry)
3. Switch OFF the ’Table/Tilt, Rotate’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
4. Remove the rear and front bottom cover. (Illustration 1-47).
Illustration 1-47 Removing bottom covers
Pedal Type Foot Switch
1-50 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-20-1 Pedal Type Foot Switch (continued)

5. Cut the tie-wrap that connects the Pedal Type Foot Switch and TBL Bd-Foot Switch cable. (Illustration 1-48).
6. Disconnect the Pedal Type Foot Switch connector.
7. Replace to the new Pedal Type Foot Switch.
Illustration 1-48 Connecting the Pedal Type Foot Switch (Right Side)
Coil the remaining Pedal

Type Foot Switch wiring
and tie –wrap with tie
Cut this Tie – wrap
Edge
Guard
Approx.
20 to 30
cm.
Pedal T ype Foot

Switch
to Foot
SW
to TBL
eTi –wrap
Board
8. Set the Pedal Type Foot Switch at right side of table. Keep approximately 20 to 30 cm of cable outside the table
and the remaining will be placed inside of bottom cover. (Illustration 1-48).
9. Connect the Pedal Type Foot Switch to the TBL Bd-Foot SW cable.
10. If the Pedal Type Foot Switch cable is too long, coil the remaining cable and tie it with tie-wrap. The cable
should occupy less space as possible to avoid obstructing the space of bottom cover.
11. Fix the Pedal Type Foot Switch cable with tie-wrap.
Verify that the cable is fixed secure.
Note
Certify that this tie-wrap holds the Pedal Type Foot Switch cable properly. The Pedal Type Foot
Switch must not be disconnected even an accidental kicking of it.
13. END
1-51 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-20-1 Pedal Type Foot Switch (Continued)
Left Side Pedal Type Foot Switch
Special Equipment
• Pedal Type Foot Switch
• Tie wraps
1. Move the Cradle to the out limit position. (farthest from Gantry)
3. Switch OFF the Table/Tilt, Rotate switches at the Gantry rear base.
4. Remove the rear and front bottom cover. (Illustration 1-30).
5. Cut the tie-wrap that connects the Pedal Type Foot Switch and TBL Bd-Mat Switch cable. (Illustration 1-32).
6. Disconnect the Foot Switch connector.
7. Replace to the new Pedal Type Foot Switch.
1-52 TABLE
REV 18 5116374
1-20 PEDAL TYPE FOOT SWITCH (CONTINUED)

8. Connect the Pedal Type Foot Switch to the TBL Bd-Mat SW cable as shown in the Illustration 1-32.
9. If the Pedal Type Foot Switch cable is too long, coil the remaining cable and tie it with tie-wrap. The cable
should occupy less space as possible to avoid obstructing the space of bottom cover. (Illustration 1-32).
10. Fix the Pedal Type Foot Switch cable with tie-wrap as indicated in the Illustration 1-32.
Verify that the cable is fixed secure.
Note
Certify that this tie-wrap holds the Pedal Type Foot Switch cable properly. The Pedal Type Foot
Switch must not be disconnected even an accidental kicking of it.
Illustration 1-49 Pedal Type Foot Switch replacement (Left Side)
Coil the remaining Pedal

Cut this tie–wrap to Type Foot Switch wiring
replace the Pedal Connectors and tie with tie–wrap.
Type Foot Switch.
to TBL Board
Approx. 20
to 30 cm.
Pedal Type
Foot Switch
12. END
1-53 TABLE
1-54 TABLE
REV 6 5116374
DAS DETECTOR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 - DAS BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 CONVERTER BOARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-2 BB (LBB, CBB or RBB) ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-3 BB CABLE ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-4 DAS POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-5 TEMPERATURE CONTROL ASSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
SECTION 2 - DAS BOARD (For GDAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2-1 CONVERTER BOARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-2 DCP BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-3 FLEX CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-4 CABLE ASSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-5 L-BACKPLATE BOARD ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-6 C-BACKPLATE BOARD ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2-7 R-BACKPLATE BOARD ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2-8 GDAS POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2-9 TEMPERATURE CONTROL ASSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
SECTION 3 - DETECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3-1 DETECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
i DAS
ii DAS
REV 1 5116374
SECTION 1 - DAS BOARD (MDAS)
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
1-1 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 1 5116374
1-1 CONVERTER BOARD
WARNING
FOLLOW ALL ELECTRO-STATIC DISCHARGE PROCEDURES.
ALWAYS USE ESD WRIST STRAP AND GROUNDING CORDS.
THE USE OF A GROUND MONITOR IS SUGGESTED.
Special Equipment
• Converter Board
1. Set the Gantry to the 0° tilt and rotate to 180° position.
2. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’ and ‘Slip Ring115V’ switches at the rear Gantry base.
3. Remove the front, left and right side Gantry covers.
5. Remove the DAS cover and Connector cover by losening nine (9) nuts on the DAS front cover and four (4) nuts
on the two sides (Illustration 1-1).
Illustration 1-1 DAS Cover and Connecter Cover Replacement
1-2 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 1 5116374
1-1 CONVERTER BOARD (CONTINUED)

6. After removing the DAS cover, the five Converter Board Boxes will be seen. Proceed to the next step to dis-
assembly the converter board box (Illustration 1-2).
7. Remove the Converter Board Box cover by unscrewing its four (4) screws (Illustration 1-2).
Note
There are numbers marked on the Converter Board Box and the cover. When reinstalling the cover,
confirm that the marked number is the same as the one on the Converter Board Box.
Illustration 1-2 Converter Board Boxes Replacement
Converter Converter Converter

Board Box #2 Board Box #3 Board Box #4 Converter
Converter Board Box #5
Board Box #1
RBB Loosen the four Screws

CBB LBB
that fasten the Converter
Board Box Cover
1-3 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 1 5116374

8. Pull the ends of both extraction levers outward simultaneously to unseat the Converter Board and take it out of
the Box (Illustration 1-3).
Illustration 1-3 Extraction Levers
Extraction Levels
9. Install the new Converter Board by performing step 8 to 3 in their reverse order.
NOTICE
When inserting the Converter Board, be very careful to adjust the Converter Board to a
suitable location and push gently, otherwise the pins may be damaged.
10. Remove the Azimuth lock pin.
11. Perform the following check/adjustment according to CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment.
AIR/PHANTOM CALIBRATION
CT No. ADJUSTMENT
IMAGE PERFORMANCE
13. END
1-4 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 1 5116374
1-2 BB (LBB, CBB OR RBB) ASSY
Special Equipment
• BB Assy
5. Disconnect Detector flexes from the appropriate backplane.
6. Disconnect the appropriate power cables and signal cables by referring to Section 1-3.
7. While holding on to the DAS chassis, remove six (6) large screws holding the chassis to the DAS mounting
blocks (see Illustration 1-5). When the last cap screw is removed, remove the chassis from the Gantry.
Illustration 1-4 Remove DAS Chassis
Screws (x6)
1-5 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 1 5116374
1-2 BB (LBB, CBB OR RBB) ASSY (CONTINUED)

8. Remove the BB Assy by unsrewing its respective screws (10 on LBB or RBB, 14 on CBB).
Illustration 1-5 Remove BB Assy
Screws
RBB
CBB
9. Install the new BB Assy by referring to Steps 7. through 4.

10. Remove the Azimuth lock pin.
12. END
1-6 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 1 5116374
1-3 BB CABLE ASSY
Special Equipment
• Cable Assy
5. Remove the DAS cover and Connector cover by unscrewing nuts on the DAS cover (total 10 nuts on the front
cover and 4 nuts on the two sides) (Illustration 1-1).
6. Disconnect the Cable Assy which should be replaced and install the new one.
7. Verify that the cable connector is securely connected on the backplane connector.
9. END
Illustration 1-6 Cable Assy Location
Power Cable Assy BB Signal Cable Assy
DAS Power DCP-DAS Signal

Cable Assy Cable Assy
1-7 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 1 5116374
1-4 DAS POWER SUPPLY
Special Equipment
• DAS Power Supply Module
2. Rotate the Gantry to approximately 190° tube position.
5. Remove all the cables from the Power Supply (Illustration 1-7).
6. Remove the two screws on the Top Side and the two screws on the Bottom Side (Illustration 1-7).
Note
Illustration 1-7 DAS Power Supply Cables Removal
Cables
Cables
Bottom Side of
the Power Supply
Screw
Top Side of
the Power Supply
Orientation Pin Screw Orientation Pin
7. Remove the Power Supply from the Gantry.

8. Install the new Power Supply by performing steps 6 to 1 in their reverse order.
Note
When put the Power Supply on the Gantry, first locate the holes (on the Top and the Bottom sides
9. END
1-8 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 1 5116374
1-5 TEMPERATURE CONTROL ASSY
Special Equipment
• Temperature Control Assy
2. Rotate the Gantry to the 300° tube position.
5. Access the Temperature Control Assy from the right side of the Gantry. Remove the Temperature Control Assy
cover by removing four nuts shown in Illustration 1-8.
Illustration 1-8 Temperature Control Assy Cover Removal

NUTS
NUTS
1-9 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 1 5116374
1-5 TEMPERATURE CONTROL ASSY (CONTINUED)

6. Remove the two connectors from the Temperature Control board.
7. Remove the Temperature Control Assy by removing four nuts shown in illustration 1-9.
8. Install new Temperature Control Assy by performing steps 7 to 1 in their reverse order.
9. END
Illustration 1-9 Temperature Control Assy

NUTS
CONNECTORS
NUTS
1-10 DAS/DETECTOR
blank
1-11 DAS/DETECTOR
1-12 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 8 5116374
SECTION 2 - DAS BOARD (GDAS)
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
2-1 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 8 5116374
2-1 CONVERTER BOARD
Special Equipment
• Converter Board
3. Remove the front and right side Gantry covers.
5. Remove the DAS Front Cover by unscrewing its screws (total 21 screws on the DAS Front Covers: respective
6 screws on the left and right cover; 9 screws on the center cover). (Illustration 2-1).
Note
Replace different Converter Board, need only remove its corresponding DAS Front Cover and
Converter Board Box Front Cover.
Illustration 2-1 Remove DAS Cover and Converter Board Box Cover
DAS Front Cover R DAS Front Cover C DAS Front Cover L
Nut (x4) for Fasten Converter

Board Box Front Cover
2-2 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 8 5116374

6. After removing the DAS Front Cover, the Converter Board Box will be seen. Proceed to the next step to dis-
assembly the converter board box (Illustration 2-1).
7. Remove the Converter Board Box cover by unscrewing its four screws (Illustration 2-1).
8. Pull the ends of both extraction levers outward simultaneously to unseat the Converter Board and take it out of
the Box.
Illustration 2-2 Extraction Levers of Converter BD
Isolation BD
Converter BD
9. Install the new Converter Board by performing step 8 to 3 in their reverse order.
NOTICE
When inserting the Converter Board, be very careful to adjust the Converter Board to a
suitable location and push gently, otherwise the pins may be damaged.
CT No. ADJUSTMENT
IMAGE PERFORMANCE
11. END
2-3 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 8 5116374
2-2 DCP BOARD
Special Equipment
• DCP Board
5. Remove the DAS Front Cover L by unscrewing its 6 screws. (Illustration 2-1).
6. After removing the DAS Front Cover L, the left Converter Board Box will be seen.
7. Remove the left Converter Board Box Front Cover by unscrewing its four screws (Illustration 2-1).
8. Pull the ends of both extraction levers outward simultaneously to unseat the DCP Board.
Illustration 2-3 Remove the DCP Board

Signal Cable
Isolation BD
DCP BD
9. Disconnect the Signal Cable from the DCP Board.

10. Take the DCP Board out of the left Converter Board Box.
2-4 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 8 5116374
2-2 DCP BOARD (CONTINUED)

11. Install the new DCP Board by performing step 10 to 3 in their reverse order.
NOTICE
When inserting the DCP Board, be very careful to adjust the DCP Board to a suitable location
and push gently, otherwise the pins may be damaged.
Pay attention to connection position of the DAS DATA Output Signal Cable (from TX port).
(See below illustration)
Illustration 2-4 DAS DATA Output Signal Cable Connection
DCP
Signal Cable
CT No. ADJUSTMENT
IMAGE PERFORMANCE
13. END
2-5 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 8 5116374
2-3 FLEX CABLE
Special Equipment
• FLEX CABLE
3. Remove the Connector cover by unscrewing its 4 screws and 2 nuts indicated by a on the DAS.
Illustration 2-5 Remove Connector Cover

Connector Cover
Nut (x2)
Screw (x4)
Flex
Cable
2-6 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 8 5116374
2-3 FLEX CABLE (CONTINUED)

4. Replace defective Flex Cable.
a. Pull the Flex Cable connector from the Detector.
b. Remove the other end of the Flex Cable connector from the back board.
c. Install the new Flex Cable.
6. END
2-7 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 8 5116374
2-4 CABLE ASSY
Special Equipment
• Cable Assy
5. Remove the DAS cover and Connector cover by unscrewing 10 nuts and 7 screws on the DAS cover. (Illus-
tration 2-6).
Illustration 2-6 Remove the Cover of GDAS

SREWS (X7): Within White Circle
NUTS (X10): Within Red Circle (10 nuts: 4 nuts on the two sides)
2-8 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 8 5116374
2-4 CABLE ASSY (CONTINUED)

6. Disconnect the Cable Assy which should be replaced and install the new one.
Illustration 2-7 Cable Assy Location
Signal Cable
Power Cable
7. Verify that the cable connector is securely connected on the backplane connector.
9. END
2-9 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 8 5116374
2-5 L-BACKPLATE BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• L-BB Assy
1. Remove the DAS Front Cover L and the left Converter Board Box Front Cover by referring to Section 2-1. (Il-
lustration 2-1).
2. Remove the 2 Converter Boards and DCP Board from the L-BB by referring to Section 2-1 and Section 2-2.
3. Remove the DAS Cover and Connector Cover by unscrewing other 6 screws and 10 nuts.
Illustration 2-8 Remove DAS Cover and Connector Cover
Screw (x6): Within White Circle

Nut (Face: x6; Side: x4): Within Red Circle
Face
Side
2-10 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 8 5116374
2-5 L-BACKPLATE BOARD ASSY (CONTINUED)

4. Remove all the Flex Cables (x11), Power Cables and Single Cables that are connected to the Left BackPlate
Board.
Illustration 2-9 L-BB Cables Removal
Flex Cable (x11)
Power Cable
(for GDAS)
Signal Cable
(To OGP, Coll)
Signal Cable
Power Cable
(Between BB)
(Between BB)
5. Remove the left Converter Board Box by unscrewing its six screws from L-BackPlate Board.
6. Remove the L-BackPlate Board by unscrewing its 10 screws.
7. Install the new L-BackPlate Board by performing steps 6. to 1. in their reverse order.
CT No. ADJUSTMENT
IMAGE PERFORMANCE
9. END
2-11 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 8 5116374
2-6 C-BACKPLATE BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• C-BB Assy
1. Remove the DAS Front Cover C and three center Converter Board Box Front Covers by referring to Section 2-
1.
Illustration 2-10 Remove the DAS Front Cover C
DAS Front Cover C
2. Remove 6 Converter Boards from the C-BB by referring to Section 2-1 and Section 2-2.
4. Remove all the Flex Cables (x24), Power Cables and Single Cables that are connected to the Center BackPlate
Board.
Illustration 2-11 C-BB Cables Removal

24 Flex Cables
2 Power Cables
(Between BB)
2 Signal Cables
(Between BB)
2-12 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 8 5116374
2-6 C-BACKPLATE BOARD ASSY (CONTINUED)

5. Remove the three Center Converter Board Boxs by unscrewing 18 screws from C-BackPlate Board.
6. Remove the C-BackPlate Board by unscrewing its 14 screws.
7. Install the new C-BackPlate Board by performing steps 6. to 1. in their reverse order.
CT No. ADJUSTMENT
IMAGE PERFORMANCE
9. END
2-13 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 8 5116374
2-7 R-BACKPLATE BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• R-BB Assy
1. Remove the DAS Front Cover R and the right Converter Board Box Front Covers by referring to Section 2-1.
Illustration 2-12 Remove the DAS Front Cover C
DAS Front Cover R
2. Remove the 2 Converter Boards from the R-BB by referring to Section 2-1 and Section 2-2.
4. Remove all the Flex Cables (x10), Power Cable and Single Cable that are connected to the Right BackPlate
Board.
Illustration 2-13 R-BB Cables Removal

Flex Cable (x10)
Signal Cable Power Cable

(Between BB) (Between BB)
2-14 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 8 5116374
2-7 R-BACKPLATE BOARD ASSY (CONTINUED)

5. Remove the Right Converter Board Box by unscrewing 6 screws from R-BackPlate Board.
6. Remove the R-BackPlate Board by unscrewing its 10 screws.
7. Install the new R-BackPlate Board by performing steps 6. to 1. in their reverse order.
CT No. ADJUSTMENT
IMAGE PERFORMANCE
9. END
2-15 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 8 5116374
2-8 GDAS POWER SUPPLY
Sepcial Equipment
5. Disconnect the cable connectors from the Power Supply. (Illustration 2-14)
Illustration 2-14 Cables of PS
Power Cable (Input)
Mounting Plate
DAS Power
RF Cable Cable (Output)
(Output)
Collimator
OGP Cable (Output)
(Output)
2-16 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 8 5116374
2-8 GDAS POWER SUPPLY (CONTINUED)

6. Cut the tie-wrap fixed on the hole of Power Supply handle shown as below.
CAUTION
Be care not to snip the cables bound on the hole of the Power Supply handle with tie-wrap.
Illustration 2-15 Hole of the PS Handle
Left
Orientation
Pin
Right
Right
Front Hole for binding Power Supply

Cables Handle
Front
7. Remove the Power Supply by unscrewing its four screws from the Mounting Plate.
Note
8. Install the new Power Supply and connect the cable connectors.
Note
9. Bind the cables beside the Power Supply to the hole of Power Supply handle with tie-wrap according to step 6.
NOTICE
Be sure that the cables are far from the bearing, and do not bind them tightly with tie-wrap
to avoid cutting cable during future possible replacement.
11. END
2-17 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 8 5116374
2-9 TEMPERATURE CONTROL ASSY
Special Equipment
• Temperature Control Assy
2. Rotate the Gantry to the 300° tube position.
5. Access the Temperature Control Assy from the right side of the Gantry. Remove the Temperature Control Assy
cover by removing four nuts shown in Illustration 3-9.
Illustration 2-16 Temperature Control Assy Cover Removal

NUTS
NUTS
2-18 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 8 5116374
2-9 TEMPERATURE CONTROL ASSY (CONTINUED)

6. Remove the two connectors from the Temperature Control board.
7. Remove the Temperature Control Assy by removing four nuts shown in illustration 2-17.
8. Install new Temperature Control Assy by performing steps 7 to 1 in their reverse order.
Illustration 2-17 Temperature Control Assy

NUTS
CONNECTORS
NUTS
2-19 DAS/DETECTOR
2-20 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 1 5116374
SECTION 3 - DETECTOR
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
3-1 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 1 5116374
3-1 DETECTOR
Special Equipment
• Detector Assy
3. Remove the front, rear, left and right side Gantry covers.
5. Remove the Connector cover by unscrewing nuts indicated by a small arrow ( ) on the DAS.
6. Remove the flexible cables (45) that are connected from the Detector to the Convertor boards.
Illustration 3-1 Removal of DAS Upper Cover
Connector
Cover
Detector
Flexible Cables
Flex
Cables
3-2 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 1 5116374
3-1 DETECTOR (CONTINUED)

7. Remove the Temperature Control Box cover.
8. Disconnect the cable connector of the Temperature Control.
9. Unscrew the three locking screws and remove the Detector carefully.
NOTICE
AVOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE!
The bottom face of the Detector (Flexible Cable Connectors) is very sensitive, so handle it
with extreme care.
Illustration 3-2 Detector Removal
Locking Screw
Z-Axis
Adjustment Nut
Detector Detector
Support Plate
Locking Screw
(Allen Head)
Z-Axis
Adjustment Nut
Plastic
Ring
Detector
Support Plate Detector
Long Pin
3-3 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 1 5116374
3-1 DETECTOR (CONTINUED)

10. Verify that the plastic ring is securely attached to a mounting hole on both sides of the Detector (see illustration
3-2).
11. Install the new Detector by referring to steps 9. through 5.
12. Remove the azimuth lock pin.
13. Perform the following checks and adjustments according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check &
Adjustment, DAS/Detector.
Note
Install the Connector cover before performing ROTATION BALANCE CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT.
ROTATION BALANCE CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT
X-RAY ALIGNMENT
HIGHLIGHT CALIBRATION (Q-Cal, XT-Cal, AV-Cal)
AIR AND PHANTOM CALIBRATION
14. Install the front and left side Gantry covers.
15. END
Illustration 3-3 New Detector
New Detector
Plastic Ring
3-4 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 1 5116374
X-RAY GENERATOR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 - X-RAY GENERATOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
SECTION 2 - AUXILIARY BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
SECTION 3 - X-RAY TUBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
SECTION 4 - X-RAY GENERATOR COMPONENTS - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4-1 JEDI GENERATOR DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4-2 HV TANK, 1 TUBE, 1-3 PHASES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
SECTION 5 - X-RAY GENERATOR COMPONENTS - II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5-1 INVERTER MID POWER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5-2 I/F BOARD NP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
SECTION 6 - X-RAY GENERATOR COMPONENTS - III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6-1 KV CONTROL BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-2 EMC BOARD 3 PHASES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6-3 AC/DC 3 PHASE MID POWER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6-4 INVERTER COILS MID POWER ASSEMBLY, OR CAPACITOR INVERTER ASSEMBLY 6-
16
SECTION 7 - X-RAY GENERATOR COMPONENTS - IV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7-1 LV POWER SUPPLY 3 PHASE BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-2 FILAMENT BOARD 1 INVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7-3 ROTATION BOARD HIGH SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-4 ROTATION CAPACITOR SET 23/23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7-5 REPLACE NONVOLATILE PARAMETERS RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
i X-RAY GENERATOR
ii X-RAY GENERATOR
REV 13 5116374
SECTION 1 - X-RAY GENERATOR
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
Special Equipment
• X-Ray Generator
• Hoist
• Silicone Oil
• Candle Stick HV lead Wrench
• Tie-wraps
• Kim Wipe
CAUTION
BURN/SHOCK HAZARD.
Wait more than five minutes following the last scan before performing the following
procedure.
CAUTION
1-1 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 13 5116374
1-1 X-RAY GENERATOR
NOTICE
When the X-Ray Generator is replaced, including a KV Cont Board, perform the following:
Refer to the illustration on the next page.
Before X-Ray Generator Replacement
1. Upload Database (#1):
a. Select the “Saved RAM Data Upload”, refer to below:
Service Menu → Diagnostics → Generator Test → Saved RAM data Upload
Click “Apply” (After “Generator Test”, system will shutdown automatically.)
b. The “Saved RAM data Upload” menu shows below:
Filter The file name jedipara.mx" required

/usr/g/service/*.mx for this procedure must be typed in.
Selection
/usr/g/service/log/jedipara.mx
c. Select “OK”, then wait to complete the “RAM Data Upload” (approximately 7 ∼ 10 minutes).
1-2 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 13 5116374
1-1 X-RAY GENERATOR (CONTINUED)
JEDI
Out of Order
#1
Yes Is
Upload SW original DB No
Database Version saved?
Before < After? (*)
Replace
Yes JEDI
Replace No Replace
JEDI JEDI
DB No System
Upload = ESR?
Possible? No
Yes
Yes #3
Download
CD-ROM
#2 Database
#2
Download
Download Original #4
Database Database Filament
(*) Calibration
SW
Version
Before=After?
Yes
No #5
Update
Error Definition File
TnT Definition File
#6
JEDI Time/Date
Set
Operational
Checks
(*) or most recent backup
END
1-3 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 13 5116374

After X-Ray Generator Replacement
1. Download Database:
1-1. From Back-up Database (#2)
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Do NOT download the old database if you are going to replace to later version of JEDI
software. Because the new version software has improved default parameters to solve some
problems.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
a. Select the “Saved RAM Data Download”, refer to below:
Service Menu → Diagnostics → Generator Test → Saved RAM data Download
Click “Apply”
b. The “Saved RAM data Download” menu shows below:
Filter The file name must be typed in for this

/usr/g/service/*.mx procedure, as jedipara.mx" (same
as saved file name at step b).
Selection
/usr/g/service/log/jedipara.mx
c. Select “OK”, then wait to complete the “RAW Data Download” (approximately 7 ∼ 10 minutes).
1-2.. From JEDI Service Tool (CD-ROM) (#3)
a. Insert the JEDI Service Tool (JEDI Software CD-ROM) into the DVD-RAM drive of the SCSI Tower.
b. Select Generator Test from the Diagnostics service menu.
c. Select Saved RAM data download.
d. Set : Filter /mnt/cdrom/*.mx ([Enter])
e. Select : Directories mnt/cdrom/cdrompx_x ([Enter])
*x_x: indicates software version
f. Select : Files npesrx_x.mx (*x_x: indicates software version Ex.)
npesrxx.mx: Np ESR (CT/e, ProSpeed AI, FI database)
npv3xx.mx: Np V3 (HiSpeed ZX/i, NX/i Pro database)
npv15xx.mx: Np V1.5 (HiSpeed LX/i, DX/i, FX/i, NX/i database)
1-4 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 13 5116374

g. Click OK.
h. Wait until a ‘successfully’ message appears. It will take approximately 10 minutes for download to finish.
i. Click Close.
j. Select Checksum saved RAM.
k. Click Confirm after a ‘successfully’ message appears.
l. Click Close.
m. Click Exit and Shutdown OC.
n. After the OC shutdown process finishes, remove the JEDI Service Tool CD-ROM from the drive.
2. Calibrate Filament (#4):
If JEDI software version is ≥ p5.2, follow the procedure below.
• If original Database is loaded, no need to perform calibration.
• If default Database is loaded, run following exposure to allow filament aging correction.
For NP V3 & NP V1.5

- Stationary, 120 kV 30 mA, small focus, 1 mm x 20 times 1 sec scan 1sec ISD
- Stationary, 120 kV 30 mA, large focus, 10 mm x 20 times 1 sec scan 1sec ISD
For NP ESR
- Stationary, 120 kV 30 mA x 20 times 2 sec scan 2sec ISD
1-5 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 13 5116374

3. Update JEDI Error Definition file and TnT Definition file (#5):
The OC has Error Definition & TnT definition files for Generator. They are different depending on JEDI software
version. If the software version of the replaced JEDI is higher than that of the previous one, Error Definition and
TnT Definition files need to be updated.
c. Select “ Error Definition file update”
d. Set: Filter /mnt/cdrom/*.csv ([Enter])
e. Select: Directories mnt/cdrom/cdrompxx ([Enter])
*xx: indicates software version
f. Select: Files efilexx.csv (*xx: indicates software version)
g. Click OK.
h. Wait until a ‘successfully’ message appears. It will take approximately 10 seconds to complete update.
i. Click Close.
j. Select “ TnT Definition file update ”
k. Set: Filter /mnt/cdrom/*.csv ([Enter])
l. Select: Directories mnt/cdrom/cdrompxx ([Enter])
m. Select: Files tntpxx.csv (*xx: indicates software version)
n. Click OK.
o. Wait until a ‘successfully’ message appears. It will take approximately two seconds to complete update.
p. Click Close.
q. Click Exit and Shutdown OC.
r. After the OC shutdown process finishes, remove the JEDI Service Tool CD-ROM from the drive.
4. Set the JEDI Time & Date correctly (#6):
a. Select the “Set JEDI Time”, refer to below:
Service Menu → Diagnostics → Generator Test → Set Jedi Time
b. Compare the JEDI time/date with system’s one. The system’s time/date are displayed in the left column on
the monitor. If these time/date were not same, set the JEDI time/date to the system’s one.
After “Generator Test”, system will shutdown automatically.
1-6 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 13 5116374

1. Preparation:
d. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’, and ‘Slip Ring 115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
e. Remove the front, right side, and left maintenance covers.
2. Rotate the Gantry by hand until the x-ray generator reaches the 1 o’clock position.
3. Remove the following cable connectors and component from the X-Ray Generator (Illustration 3-2).
• Fan Bracket 11 Screws (For System with D3152T Tube)
• 3 Power Cables leading from the Slip Ring Assy
• J1 and J2 (AC/DC BD) leading from the JEDI Auxiliary Box
• J2 leading from the OGP Assy
• J3 (KV Cntrl BD) Flat Cable Connector
• J3 leading from the JEDI Auxiliary Box
• HV Cables Anode/Cathode
(If these are not accessible, rotate the Gantry by hand.)
Wipe any residual oil from the lead to avoid dripping and insert kimwipe into the receptacle to prevent oil from
leaking. Cover HV cable leads with kimwipe to protect then.
Illustration 1-1 Cable Connectors Removal
J1 / J2
Flat Cable
HV Cables
HV Lead Wrench
J3
Fan Bracket
J2 Connector
1-7 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 13 5116374

4. Remove the three power cables from the X-ray Generator:
a. Rotate the Gantry by hand until a bottom cover of the X-ray Generator is accessible.
b. Remove the bottom cover of the X-ray Generator by removing 5 screws (Illustration 1-2).
c. Remove the three power cables from the bottom of the X-ray Generator by removing three nuts
(31kg.cm(3N.m)) (Illustration 1-2).
d. Install the bottom cover of the X-ray Generator.
Illustration 1-2 XG Power Cable Removal
(31kg.cm(3N.m))
Viewed from Bottom
Bottom Cover
Screw (x5)
Power Cables
1-8 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 13 5116374

5. Remove the X-ray Generator from the Gantry rotational frame:
a. Remove the Hoist Rail locking screw.
b. Slide out the Hoist Rail, then install the Hoist as shown in illustration 1-3.
c. Slide the Hoist Rail to appropriate position, then attach the hoist chain to the X-ray Generator hook and pull
in all loose chain until the chain is taut.
d. Unscrew 6 Allen screws and 2 Nylon nuts, and remove the X-ray Generator from the Gantry rotational
frame.
e. Slide the Hoist Rail to appropriate position, then lower the X-ray Generator carefully onto the floor.
Illustration 1-3 X-Ray Generator Removal
Hoist Rail
Locking Screw
Gantry Rotational Stud
Frame
Nylon Nut
(450kgf.cm(44N.m))
Stud
Allen Screw (x6) Nylon Nut

(450kgf.cm(44N.m)) (450kgf.cm(44N.m))
1-9 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 13 5116374

6. Install the new X-ray Generator referring to steps 5.
7. Connect the HV cables:
a. Clean each HV cable receptacle of the new X-ray Generator, and fill in the silicone oil into them.
b. Insert the HV cable leads into the receptacles. Remove the leads and check if all its internal surface is
soaked with silicone oil. If not add more silicon oil into the receptacles and repeat this step.
c. Tighten HV cable leads using HV lead wrench.
8. Connect all the cables to the X-ray Generator referring to steps 4 through 3.
9. Install the Hoist Rail locking screw.
11. END
1-10 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374
SECTION 2 - AUXILIARY BOX
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
CAUTION
Special Equipment
• Auxiliary Box
• Hoist
• Tie-wraps
WARNING
MECHANICAL HAZARD!
FAILURE TO HOLD THE GANTRY USING THE AZIMUTH LOCK PIN PRIOR TO REMOVING
COMPONENTS MAY LEAD TO GANTRY MOTION WHICH CAN STRIKE A PERSON CAUSING
INJURY OR DEATH.
2-1 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374
2-1 AUXILIARY BOX

1. Preparation:

d. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’, and ‘Slip Ring 115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
e. Remove the front, right side, and left maintenance covers.
2. Rotate the Gantry by hand until X-Ray Tube reaches the 12 o’clock position.
4. Cut the tie-wrap of the wires connected to the JEDI Auxiliary Box as shown in Illustration 2-1.
5. Disconnect all external cable connectors from the JEDI Auxiliary Box.
Illustration 2-1 Auxiliary Box Connectors
Cable Connectors
2-2 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374
2-1 AUXILIARY BOX (CONTINUED)

6. Remove 6 Allen bolts and remove the Auxiliary Box (Illustration 2-2).
7. Install the new Auxiliary Box using 6 Allen bolts removed in the previous step.
8. Connect the connectors removed in step 5.
9. Secure the wires using tie-wraps at the position it was removed in step 4.
ROTATION BALANCE CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT
11. END
Illustration 2-2 Auxiliary Box Removal
Screws
(x6)
2-3 X-RAY GENERATOR

blank
2-4 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 13 5116374
SECTION 3 - X-RAY TUBE
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
Person Required: One field engineer
Special Equipment
• Hoist (46-195700G1)
• Tube Oil
• Candle Stick HV lead Wrench (2215804)
• Tie-wraps
• Kim Wipe
• Functional Check/Adjustment Manual (5116376)
WARNING
MECHANICAL HAZARD!
FAILURE TO HOLD THE GANTRY USING THE AZIMUTH LOCK PIN PRIOR TO REMOVING
COMPONENTS MAY LEAD TO GANTRY MOTION WHICH CAN STRIKE A PERSON CAUSING
INJURY OR DEATH.
CAUTION
BURN/SHOCK HAZARD.
Wait more than fifteen minutes following the last scan before performing the following
procedure.
3-1 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 13 5116374
3-1 X-RAY TUBE


2. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate‘, ‘XG Power‘ and ‘Slip Ring115V‘ switches at the rear Gantry base.
3. Remove the front, right side, and left maintenance covers.
4. Rotate the Gantry until the x-ray tube is at the 90 degree position.
Illustration 3-1 Azimuth Lock Pin
Azimuth Lock Pin
3-2 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 13 5116374
3-1 X-RAY TUBE (CONTINUED)

6. Remove the Hoist Rail locking screw.
7. Slide out the Hoist Rail, then install the Hoist as shown in illustration 3-2.
8. Slide the Hoist Rail to appropriate position, then attach the hoist chain to the X-ray tube hook and pull in all
loose chain until the chain is taut.
Illustration 3-2 Hoist Installation
Hoist Rail
Locking Screw
3-3 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 13 5116374

9. Pull out the Cathode main HV cable lead from the X-ray tube and discharge it by touching all three prongs to
a ground such as the tank.
Note
Take care not to damage the HV Cable leads
10. Wipe any residual oil from the lead to avoid dripping and insert kimwipe into the receptacle to prevent oil from
leaking.
11. Pull out the Anode main HV cable lead from the X-ray tube and discharge it by touching all three prongs to a
ground such as the tank.
12. Wipe any residual oil from the lead to avoid dripping and insert kimwipe into the receptacle to prevent oil from
leaking.
13. Cut the tie wraps holding the HV cables to the X-ray tube housing.
14. Disconnect the rotor control connector.
15. Disconnect Fan/Pump power cable connector (yellow cable).
Illustration 3-3 Cable Connectors Removal
Fan/Pump Power
Cable Connector
Rotor Control
Cable Connector
3-4 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 13 5116374

16. Unscrew the M6 cap screw, which is used for ISO adjustment.
17. Loosen and remove the four mounting screws (Carefully with the X-ray tube secure : Torque = 285kgf.cm)
Illustration 3-4 X-Ray Tube Removal
M6 Cap Screw
(117kgf.cm)
Mounting Plate
Mounting
Screws (x 4)
(285kgf.cm)
3-5 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 13 5116374

18. Use the hoist to slowly lower the X-ray tube to the ground.
19. Remove the mounting plate (2244119) by unscrewing four plate screws.
Dispose the four plate screws, do not use them for the new X-ray tube.
20. Install the mounting plate onto the new X-ray tube with new screws (2122264, M10 x 1.5 x 18mm). Then use
the hoist to raise the new X-ray tube into place.
21. Install the new X-ray tube by performing steps 19. through 6. In the step 17. use new screws (U0442AA, M10
x 1.5 x 45mm) for mounting the X-ray tube to the Gantry.
Illustration 3-5 Mounting Plate Removal
Plate
Screws (x 4)
(285kgf.cm)
3-6 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 13 5116374

22. Retie any tie wraps which were removed in step 13. (see illustration below).
Illustration 3-6 X-Ray Tube Tie-Wrap Configuration
3-7 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 13 5116374

23. Switch ON the “Slip Ring 115V” switch at the rear Gantry base, and verify that the radiator FAN for the x-ray
tube cooling and JEDI Power Unit FAN are operating normally.
24. Update ‘Tube Usage’ Log and ‘Tube Spits’ log:
a. Select Update System Log; refer to below:
Service Menu-->Error logs-->Update System Log

b. Select Tube Usage from the lists,
c. Type/enter the new Tube information, and press [Create].
d. Select Tube Spits from the lists, and press [Create].
e. Select Bad Raw from the lists, and press [Create].
25. Perform the following to initialize the Filament Data:
a. Select the ‘Clear Filament aging/Tube status’ menu as below;
Service Menu-->Diagnostics-->Generator Test-->Clear Filament aging/Tube status

b. Click ‘Apply’, then click ‘OK’ to clean-up the old Filament/Tube data.
The system automatically restarts.


X-RAY ALIGNMENT
KV AND mA CHECK
DAS COUNT CHECK
Q CALIBRATION (Q-Cal)
SYSTEM CALIBRATION
CT No. ADJUSTMENT
IMAGE PERFORMANCE
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Certify that the Rear TSW is horizontally, vertically and center aligned.
Adjust the Rear TSW so that there is no clearance between its edge and the cover.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
27. END
3-8 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374
SECTION 4 - X-RAY GENERATOR COMPONENTS - I
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
4-1 JEDI GENERATOR DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
1 INTRODUCTION
This section provides information to dismount and remount FRU (Field Replaceable Unit).
2 TOOLS
Serviceability of Jedi Generator requires the following tools:
K
Digital multimeter (A)
Phillips screwdriver (B)
J
Allen key (C)
Screwdriver with interchangeable socket head (D)
Long extension for ratchet wrench (E) F I
Short extension for ratchet wrench (F)
Cutting pliers (G)
High Voltage wrench (H) C
Ratchet wrench (I) E
A
Socket wrench (J)
Hexagonal head socket set (K)
D G
B H
4-1 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374
4-2 HV TANK, 1 TUBE, 1-3 PHASES

Time: 0 h 35 min. - Personnel: 1 field engineer
1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
5.5 mm nut driver or socket wrench with ratchet (to remove screws)
10 mm allen wrench (to remove the bolts into the heat sink)
13 mm socket with ratchet (to remove primary coil flat cables)
3 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
before any manual intervention, ensure the main power is off. Apply lock out - tag
DANGER
out procedure for your own safety when manipulating inside the equipment is
required.
To protect the circuit boards, do not forget to wear the antistatic bracelet.
4 PREREQUISITES
The internal CAN cable, Heater cable, DC bus cable, ground cable, the Three-phase input cable and
three screws on the EMC cover must be removed before handling the Power unit.
The generator Power Unit (66 kg) must be removed and put on the floor or on a work bench using the
special hoist that is part of the gantry.
4-2 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374
4-2 HV TANK, 1 TUBE, 1-3 PHASES (CONTINUED)
5 PROCEDURE
WARNING
THE POWER UNIT WEIGHS 66 KILOGRAMS. BE SURE TO USE THE SPECIAL
HOIST AND TO BE CAREFUL WHEN MOVING IT.
5–1 Position The Power Unit
1. With the 10 mm allen wrench, only loosen the 3

bolts (located at the bottom) which fasten the HV
Tank to the heat sink.
2. Remove only the central bolt.
3. Position the Power Unit on its side, the heat sink down.
lllustration 1 - Rear view
5–2 Remove Front Cover (If not already done)
Unscrew the twelve 5.5 mm hex head screws on three

sides (4 screws on each side; top, right, left in photo)
and remove the front cover.
Front View
5–3 Disconnect Cables
1. Disconnect the filament cable from the top of the
KV Measure Board 1 (which forms part of the top
of the HV Tank). 1
4-3 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374
4
2. Disconnect the wider short ribbon cable 2 , con-
necting the KV Control board to the KV Measure 1
Board, from the top of the KV Measure board.
2
3. Using a 13 mm socket wrench, remove the three nuts 3 attaching the primary coil flat cables to the
round capacitors located on the shelf just above the KV Measure board.
Illustration 2 -
4. Disconnect the short ribbon cable 4 , connecting the Gate Command Board (on the Inverter Mid
Power Assembly) to the KV Measure Board, from the top of the KV Measure board.
4-4 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374
5–4 Freeing the Tank

1. Remove the two 5.5 mm hex screws from the flange above the part of the tank extending out of the
Power Unit 1 .
2. Just loosen 6 screws 2 (this will allow some play to facilitate the removal and installation of the HV
tank.)
Illustration 3 -
4-5 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374
3. Remove the two 5.5 mm hex screws

away from the HV outlets 1 ; 2
4. Remove the single screw next to the HV
outlets 2 .
CAUTION
If any screw falls down,
make sure to get them
back after.
Illustration 4 -
5. By hand or with the 10 mm allen wrench, starting with the bolts farthest from the HV outlets 3 ,
remove the two remaining HV Tank retaining bolts from the bottom of the cast aluminum heat sink 4 .
4 3
4-6 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374
6. Holding down the primary coil flat cables, slide the tank out of the Power Unit.
Take the flat cable from the kV Measure board on the HV tank and mount it on the new HV tank.
4-7 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374
6 REASSEMBLY
1. Gently slide the new HV Tank into the Power Unit and position it so that the holes are aligned and the
bolts can be threaded into both units.
2. Insert the 3 retaining bolts through the heat sink.

3. Insert the 5.5 mm hex head screws on the HV outlet end at the far end that secure the HV Tank to the
chassis (refer to Illustration 4, 1 and 2 ), then the two 5.5 mm hex head screws in the flange jutting
out of the unit (refer to Illustration 3, 1 ). Tighten them all to 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm).
4. Reconnect the short ribbon cable from the Gate Command board (on the Inverter Mid Power assem-
bly).
4-8 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374
5. Using the 13 mm socket wrench connect the primary coil flat cables to the three capacitors (refer to
Illustration 2, 3 ).
CAUTION
The two flat cables with white
bands on them go both together
on the middle capacitor with the
parallel resonant coil cable 1 .
Tighten the nuts to 10 N.m (approx. 100 kgf.cm).

1
6. Reconnect the following cables to the KV Mea-

sure board:
• Wider short ribbon cable from the KV Control board
• Filament cable from the Auxiliary Unit
7. Stand the Power Unit on end, the EMC cover down.
8. With the 10 mm allen wrench, tighten the 3 bolts that fasten the HV Tank to the heat sink to 20 N.m
(200 kg.cm). (See Illustration 1).
9. Tighten the screws 2 referred in Illustration 3 to between 1.5 and 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm)
10. Perform an overall inspection before proceeding.
11. Reinstall the front cover. Tighten the twelve 5.5 mm hex head screws to 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20
kg.cm).
12. Lift the power unit back onto the gantry and attach it. Reconnect all the cables.
7 VERIFY
Proceed to HV ”No Load Diagnostics” to ensure correct operation.
4-9 X-RAY GENERATOR

blank

REV 1 5116374
SECTION 5 - X-RAY GENERATOR COMPONENTS - II
5-1 INVERTER MID POWER ASSEMBLY

1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
Long, large Phillips screwdriver (to remove three screws on Inverter assembly cable).
5.5 mm socket, with ratchet if possible (to remove screws)
10 mm and 13 mm socket with ratchet (to remove cable connector nuts)
10 mm allen wrench (to remove the bolts into the heat sink)
DANGER
BEFORE ANY MANUAL INTERVENTION, ENSURE THE MAIN POWER IS OFF.
APPLY LOCK OUT - TAG OUT PROCEDURE FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY WHEN
MANIPULATING INSIDE THE EQUIPMENT IS REQUIRED.
4 PREREQUISITES
three screws on the EMC cover must be removed before handling the Power unit
5-1 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374
5-1 INVERTER MID POWER ASSEMBLY (CONTINUED)
5 PROCEDURE
THE POWER UNIT WEIGHS 66 KILOGRAMS. BE SURE TO USE THE SPECIAL

WARNING
HOIST AND TO BE CAREFUL WHEN MOVING IT.
5–1 Remove Heat Sink Bolts
With the Power Unit standing on end.

1
1. Remove the seven bolts holding the Inverter Heat Sink 1 .
2. Loosen the two bolts holding the HV Tank through the Inverter heat
sink 2 .
2 1 2
5–2 Remove Covers Rear View
1. Unscrew the 5.5 mm hex head screws from three sides and remove the
front cover (If not already done).
2. Unscrew and remove the lifting bracket plate 3 .

Front View
Note that all the 5.5 mm hex head screws on

the Jedi generator are 8 mm long, except for 3
the fourteen screws holding the lifting bracket
which are 12 mm long.
Top View
3. Position the Power Unit on its side, the heat sink down.
5-2 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374
4. Unscrew the six 5.5 mm hex head screws on the lateral part of the
L–shaped cover under the lifting bracket and remove the cover 4 .
4
Illustration 1Power unit lying on Heat Sink
5. Unscrew the 5.5 mm hex head screws and remove the right l
ateral cover over the AC/DC board.
5–3 Separate the Inverter Mid Power Assembly
1. Using a 10 mm socket wrench, disconnect the two DC cables :
-DC, +DC 5 from the AC/DC board.
Retain the locking washers. 5
Ensure that the two cables are marked.

The Inverter will be damaged if the + and
CAUTION
- DC Bus cables are reversed.
Illustration 2
2. Remove the remaining two HV Tank retaining bolts from the bottom
of the cast aluminum heat sink 6 .
5-3 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374
3. Slide the entire block 7 and pull the DC cables out 8 .

A
Illustration 6
10
Illustration 7 A View
4. Disconnect the short ribbon cable from the KV Measure board to the Gate Command board 9 .
5. Disconnect the measure current cable from the kV measure board 10 .
5-4 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374
6. Unscrew the 5.5 mm hex head screws and remove the lateral
cover 11 . (The Inverter assembly is now mechanically free

and only retained by five cables) .
Illustration 6
11
7. Disconnect the two Parallel Resonance

Inductor cables from the Inverter capacitor
assembly 12 .
Overhead View 12
8. Disconnect connector J4 on the Gate
Command board 13 .
13
Illustration 7-
5-5 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374
9. For better access, pull the inverter slightly towards you to
partially disengage it (about 20 mm) 14 .
14
Pull
A
10. Using the philips screwdriver, disconnect the three resonance coils from the IGBTs 15 .
15
15
Dual
Snub
Board
A
5-6 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374

11. Remove the cables and separate the Inverter Mid Power Assembly.
Resonance
Inductor
Gate Command Board
Inverter
Mid Power
Assembly
Dual Snub Board
5-7 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374
6 REASSEMBLY
6–1 Mount the new Inverter Assembly
1. Present the new inverter assembly as indicated in Illustration 7,
To facilitate the operation,

1.Push to the left the two cables of the parallel resonant coil.
2.Raise the three cables from the serial resonant coil assembly in order to protect the components of the
Inverter assembly.
3.Retain the two other connectors that are to be mounted on the Inverter Gate Supply board on the Inverter
assembly.
Illustration 7
5-8 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374

2. Attach the three cables from the serial resonant coil assembly to the Inverter assembly IGBTs using the philips
screwdriver; refer to 1 , and view A .

There is a locking washer between the screws and the cables. Tighten firmly to 3 N.m (30 kg.cm).
RESPECT THE ORIENTATION OF THE CABLES TO THE IGBTS CONNECTIONS

WARNING
TO AVOID Q100C CABLE CONTACT WITH TOP COVER.
1 1
3.
Connect the current measurement feedback connector (J4) to the Gate Command board (refer to Illustration
4, 10 ).
4. Engage the Inverter assembly into position (refer to Illustration 6, A ).
5-9 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374
5. Pass the two cables from the parallel B
resonant coil as indicated 2 .

A
- Attach the shorter wire on the

pass through the current trans-
former with the 10 mm screw and
its washers A .
Tighten to torque 3 N.m (30 kg.cm).
- Attach the longer wire on the Overhead view

central capacitor of the capacitor 2 2
inverter with the 13 mm screws
and their washers, together with
the two primary HV transformer
flat wires (the two with a white
spot or ring mark).
Tighten to torque 10 N.m (approx. 100 kgf.cm).
B A

REV 1 5116374
6. Connect the flat cable from the HV tank to the Inverter Gate Command board (refer to Illustration 4 9 ).
7. Connect the DC bus connector to the Inverter Gate Command board (Refer to Illustration 6, 13 ).
Perform an overall inspection before proceeding.
6–2 Reassemble the Power unit
1. Remount the left lateral cover 1 .
Note: Don’t place any screws on 2 .
2. Remount the angled cover and only the right screws without 2 1
tightening them (refer to Illustration 1, 4 ).
3. Position the ”HV Tank-Inverter -kV Control” assembly while passing the two DC bus wires through the hole on
the AC/DC frame (refer to Illustration 3, 8 ).
4. Attach the six bolts through the accessible holes 3 . Tighten four of
them to torque 20 N.m (200 kg.cm).
4
Note: The short screws with the flat washers are
always towards the top 4 . The long ones 5
are located at the bottom 5 .
Rear View

REV 1 5116374
- + 6
5. Attach + and - wires of the DC bus to the AC/DC board.
- Insert the screw and grower washer, then tighten

to torque 3 N.m (30 kg.cm).
ENSURE POLARITY IS OBSERVED.

WARNING AN INVERSION WOULD DESTROY
THE INVERTER AND AC/DC BOARD
AT POWER-UP.
Illustration 8 AC/DC 3 Phases Mid Power

Assembly
6. Put the complete assembly in the vertical position.

- Insert the remaining bolts and tighten to torque 20 N.m (200 kg.cm).
7. Mount the top lifting bracket by fitting the fourteen 5.5 mm, 12 mm long screws and tighten all of them to 1.5 to
2 N.m (15 to 20kg.cm).
8. Reconnect the DC bus cable to the top of the AC/DC board (whichever connector) (refer to Illustration 8, 6 ).
9. Remount the AC/DC cover.
6–3 Reassembly to the Gantry

1. Lift the power unit back on to the gantry and attach it.
2. Reconnect all cables and remount the EMC cover.
3. Mount the front cover.

REV 1 5116374
7 VERIFY
1. Verify the operation
2. Run the INVERTER diagnostics:
•Inverter Gate Command Diagnostics

•Inverter in Short Circuit Diagnostics.

REV 1 5116374
5-2 I/F BOARD NP

1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
5.5 mm nut driver or socket wrench with ratchet.

DANGER
Note: The I/F board NP may be replaced while the JEDI generator is on the gantry.

REV 1 5116374
5-2 I/F BOARD NP (CONTINUED)
4 PROCEDURE
4–1 Remove Cover (If not already done)

Unscrew the twelve 5.5 mm hex head screws on three sides (4 screws on each side; top, right, left) and
remove the front cover.
4–2 Remove the Board
1. Disconnect the short ribbon cable that 2

connects the I/F Board NP to the KV Control
board 1 .
2. Unscrew the three 5.5 mm hex nut screws
that are directly on the flat surface of the
board 2 .
3. Then unscrew the four 4.5 mm hex head
screws of the connectors on the outside of
3
the chassis 3 .
4. Remove the board.
1
3
I/F Board NP
5 REASSEMBLY
Reverse the disassembly procedures to reinstall the I/F Board NP.
Tighten the 5.5 mm hex head screws to 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm).
6 VERIFY
Reapply power and verify that the system functions correctly.
Put the cover back. Tighten the 5.5 mm hex head screws to 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm).

blank

REV 13 5116374
SECTION 6 - X-RAY GENERATOR COMPONENTS - III
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
6-1 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 13 5116374
6-1 KV CONTROL BOARD

Time: 0 h 30 min - Personnel: 1 field engineer
1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS

DANGER
4 PREREQUISITES
The KV Control board contains a saved memory Database with essentially the following parameters:
- Tube configuration parameters
- Filament ageing variable
- Error Log
- Recorded parameter data
If it is possible, backup database first. Else, the diagram below helps you to determine the action to take
for your situation. Refer to below to perform the backup.
Service Menu → Diagnostics → Generator Test → Saved RAM data Upload
Note: The KV Control Board may be replaced while the JEDI generator is on the gantry.
6-2 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 13 5116374
6-1 KV CONTROL BOARD (CONTINUED)
Note: Possible Replacement:

Various software versions exist for KV Control boards. They are developed to have Backward
Compatibility. The table below shows the possible replacement of them.
Replacement for NP V1.5 (LX/i, DX/i, FX/i, NX/i)
KV control board in the field Possible replacement parts in GPO store
No. Part Softwar Databa 2230555 2230555-2 2230555-6 2265276 2230555-6 (Continued
No. e se (P5.4, NP with to below)
Version V3) 2255209-2
1 223055 P4.0 NP V1.5 OK OK - - OK (*1)

5
2 223055 P4.06 NP V1.5 - OK - - OK (*1)

5-2
3 223055 P5.4 NP V1.5 - - OK - OK

5-6
4 223055 P5.47 NP V1.5 - - - - -

5-7
No. Part Softwar Databa 2265276 2230555-7 2230555-7 - - -

No. e se (P5.4, NP with
Version V3) 2255209-4
with
2255209-2
1 223055 P4.0 NP V1.5 - OK (*1) - - - -

5
2 223055 P4.06 NP V1.5 - OK (*1) - - - -

5-2
3 223055 P5.4 NP V1.5 - OK (*1) - - - -

5-6
4 223055 P5.47 NP V1.5 - OK OK - - -

5-7
(Continued to next page)
6-3 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 13 5116374
Replacement for NP ESR (CT/e, ProSpeed AI, FI) and NP V3 (HiSpeed ZX/i, NX/i Pro)
KV control board in the field Possible replacement parts in GPO store
No. Part No. Softwar Databas 2230555-5 2214606-13 2230555-6 2265276 2230555-6 (Continued
e e (P5.4, NP with to below)
Version V3) 2255209-2
4 2230555 P5.2 NP ESR OK - - - OK (*1) (*2)

-5
5 2214606 P5.2 NP V3 - OK - - -
13
6 2230555 P5.4 NP ESR - - OK (*2) - OK (*1) (*2)

-6
7 2214606 P5.4 NP V3 - - - OK -
-16
8 2230557 P5.47 NP ESR - - - - -

-7
9 2214606 P5.47 NP V3 - - - - -
-19
No. Part No. Softwar Databas 2265276 2230555-7 2265276-2 2230555-7 - -

e e (P5.4, NP with with
Version V3) 2255209-4 2255209-4
with
2255209-2
4 2230555 P5.2 NP ESR - OK (*1) (*2) - - - -

-5
5 2214606 P5.2 NP V3 OK (*1) - OK (*1) - - -

13
6 2230555 P5.4 NP ESR - OK (*1) (*2) - - - -

-6
7 2214606 P5.4 NP V3 OK - OK (*1) - - -

-16
8 2230557 P5.47 NP ESR - OK (*2) - OK (*2) - -

-7
9 2214606 P5.47 NP V3 - - OK - - -
-19
OK: Possible replacement.

(*1): Need to update “ Error definition file ” and “ Tracking and Trending definition file ” using JEDI Service Tool
assy (Software CD-ROM: 2255209-x).
(*2): Need to download NP ESR database using JEDI Service tool, which attached to system as an accessory.
Because, NP V1.5 KV control board and NP ESR KV control board are common parts. Default database is set
as NP V1.5.
6-4 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 13 5116374

If the software version of the KV Control board to be replaced is earlier than or equal to that of the new KV Control
board, follow the procedure illustrated below; otherwise, proceed to next page.
NOTE: If the variation No. of the new board (xxxxxxx-yy) is larger than that of the board to be replaced (with the
same part No.), it indicates that the software version of the new board is later than that of the board to be replaced.
First Installation
Configura Calibration Save Non KV Control

tion Volatile RAM Out of Order
Database
Replace
KV Control
Yes SW
OK?
No
No System
Download = ESR?
Software
Yes
Download
CD-ROM
Database
Calibration
Reset
Database:
- Date
- Time
- Clear Error log SW
Version
Before=After?
Yes
Operational
Checks No
Update
Save Non Volatile Error Definition File
RAM Database TnT Definition File
END
6-5 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 13 5116374

If the software version of the KV Control board to be replaced is equal to that of the new KV Control board, follow
the procedure illustrated below.
NOTE: If the variation No. of the new board (xxxxxxx-yy) is larger than that of the board to be replaced (with the
same part No.), it indicates that the software version of the new board is later than that of the board to be replaced.
First Installation
Calibration Save Non KV Control

Configuration Volatile RAM Out of Order
Database
DB Is
Upload Yes Upload No original DB No
Database Possible? saved?
(*)
Yes Replace
KV Control
Replace Replace
KV Control KV Control
Yes SW
OK?
SW No Download Yes SW
Software No
OK? OK? No System
Download = ESR?
Yes No Software
Download Yes
Software
Download
CD-ROM
Database
Download
Download Original
Database Database
(*)
Calibrate if
applicable
Reset
Database: Operational Save Non Volatile
- Date Checks RAM Database
- Time
- Clear Error log
END
(*) or most recent backup
6-6 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 13 5116374
5 DISASSEMBLY
5–1 Remove Cover (If not already done)
Unscrew the twelve 5.5 mm hex head screws on three sides (4 screws on each side; top, right, left) and
remove the front cover.
5–2 Remove Cables
1. Disconnect the short ribbon cable 1 that

connects the KV Control board to the I/F Board
KV
NP. Control
Board
I/F Board NP 1 2 Non volatile

Parameters
RAM
2. Disconnect the short ribbon cable 2 that connects the KV Control board to the KV Measure board on the top
of the HV Tank.

Unscrew the seven 5.5 mm hex nut screws and
remove the board.
6 REASSEMBLY
Reverse the disassembly procedures to reinstall the KV Control board.
Tighten all 5.5 mm hex head screws to 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm).
6-7 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 13 5116374
7 VERIFY
1. Reapply power and verify that the 8 LEDs on KV Control board are scrolling.
2. Refer to section 4 above for information concerning reload of the appropriate Data Base parameters in the Non
Volatile RAM.
3. Verify software version.
- If it corresponds to your system or is backward compatible, go to 4.
- If not, download software.
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Do NOT download the old database or swap the chip (see the descriptions below), if the
software version of the new board is equal to or later than that of the old one (Before < After).
Because the new version software has improved default parameters to solve some
problems.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Download Data Base from operator console.
4-1.From Back-up Data Base
Service Menu → Diagnostics → Generator Test → Saved RAM data Download
- Up-to-date Data Base if available
- Most recent or originally saved Data Base if available
- Default Data Base.
Alternately, you may try to swap the NVRAM chip (U32) from the former to the new KV Control board to keep all
the parameters. Refer to NVRAM replacement procedure. If this chip is not involved in the failure or the cause for
replacement, it will allow to keep up-to-date data.
6-8 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 13 5116374

4-2. From JEDI Service Tool (CD-ROM)
c. Select Saved RAM data download.
d. Set: Filter /mnt/cdrom/*.mx ([Enter])
e. Select: Directories mnt/cdrom/cdrompx_x ([Enter])
*x_x: indicates software version
f. Select: Files npesrx_x.mx (*x_x: indicates software version
Ex) npesrxx.mx: Np ESR (CT/e, ProSpeed AI, FI database)
npv3xx.mx: Np V3 (HiSpeed ZX/i, NX/i Pro database)
npv15xx.mx: Np V1.5 (HiSpeed LX/i, DX/i, FX/i, NX/i database)
g. Click OK.
h. Wait until a ‘successfully’ message appears. It will take approximately 10 minutes for download to finish.
i. Click Close.
j. Select Checksum saved RAM.
k. Click Confirm after a ‘successfully’ message appears.
l. Click Close.
m. Click Exit and Shutdown OC.
n. After the OC shutdown process finishes, remove the JEDI Service Tool CD-ROM from the drive.
5. Display the date and time set on the JEDI generator. Refer to below:
Service Menu → Diagnostics → Generator Test → Set JEDI Time
6. Compare the date/time of JEDI and the date/time of the system which is displayed in the left column of the
screen.
- If both are the same, go to step 7.
- If both are not the same, set the JEDI date/time to the date/time of the system.
6-9 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 13 5116374

7. Calibrate :
7-1.For Software Version < p5.2
- If up-to-date, run a few scans in various technique on both filament.
- If recent, to calibrate the filament, perform several scans at low mA then high mA of both large
and small focus with exposure time longer than 12.5 ms.
- If default Data Base was loaded, run several scans to allow filament ageing correction to
operate, on both large and small focus with exposure time longer than 12.5 ms.
7-1. For Software Version ≥ p5.2
- If original Data Base is loaded, no need to perform calibration.
- If default Data Base is loaded, run following exposure to allow filament aging correction.
For NP V3 & NP V1.5

- -Stationary, 120 kV 30 mA, small focus, 1 mm x 20 times 1 sec scan 1sec ISD
- -Stationary, 120 kV 30 mA, large focus, 10 mm x 20 times 1 sec scan 1sec ISD
For NP ESR
- -Stationary, 120 kV 30 mA x 20 times 1 sec scan 1sec ISD
- -Stationary, 140 kV 30 mA x 20 times 1 sec scan 1sec ISD

REV 13 5116374

8. Update JEDI Error Definition file and TnT Definition file.
The OC has Error Definition & TnT definition files for Generator. They are different depending on JEDI software
version. If the software version of the replaced KV Control board is higher than that of the previous one, Error
Definition and TnT Definition files need to be updated.
c. Select “ Error Definition file update”
d. Set: Filter /mnt/cdrom/*.csv ([Enter])
e. Select: Directories mnt/cdrom/cdrompxx ([Enter])
f. Select: Files efilexx.csv (*xx: indicates software version)
g. Click OK.
h. Wait until a ‘successfully’ message appears. It will take approximately 10 seconds to complete update.
i. Click Close.
j. Select “ TnT Definition file update ”
k. Set: Filter /mnt/cdrom/*.csv ([Enter])
l. Select: Directories mnt/cdrom/cdrompxx ([Enter])
m. Select: Files tntpxx.csv (*xx: indicates software version)
n. Click OK.
o. Wait until a ‘successfully’ message appears. It will take approximately two seconds to complete update.
p. Click Close.
q. Click Exit and Shutdown OC.
r. After the OC shutdown process finishes, remove the JEDI Service Tool CD-ROM from the drive.

REV 13 5116374
6-2 EMC BOARD 3 PHASES

1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
10 mm socket wrench with ratchet

DANGER
Note: The EMC board 3 Phases may be replaced while the JEDI generator is on the gantry.

REV 13 5116374
6-3 AC/DC 3 PHASE MID POWER ASSEMBLY

1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
5.5 mm socket, with ratchet if possible (to remove cover and board)
10 mm socket with ratchet (to remove DC and rectifier cables)
Large Phillips screw driver (to remove cables from the rectifier block).
DANGER
1. Insure that the neon (orange) indicator light on the board has gone out.
2. Be careful touching components on this board; some become very hot.
3. To protect the circuit boards, do not forget to wear the antistatic bracelet.
Note: The AC/DC 3 Phases Mid Power Assembly may be replaced while the JEDI generator is on the
gantry.

REV 13 5116374
6-3 AC/DC 3 PHASE MID POWER ASSEMBLY (CONTINUED)
4 PROCEDURE
The AC/DC 3 Phase Mid Power Assembly is made up of two main elements: AC/DC Board, 3 Phases
and Rectifier Block, 3 Phases.
4–1 Remove Cover

The AC/DC 3 Phase board is under the right lateral cover on the opposite side from the HV Tank.
Remove the three 5.5 mm hex head screws on the front, loose the 3 on the side, and slide off the cover.
- 1
+
4–2 Remove Cables
1. Retain position of the cables terminals 1 and 2 .

1. First remove the two DC cables (-DC,+DC) fastened with 10
mm nuts on the board 1 .

2. Disconnect, at the board, the 2 cables to the Rectifier Block
2 . They are fastened with 10 mm nuts.

Remove the eight 5.5 mm hex head screws and lift out -
2
the board.
Rectifier Block
Illustration 1 AC/DC 3 Phases Mid Power Assembly

REV 13 5116374
6-3 AC/DC 3 PHASE MID POWER ASSEMBLY (CONTINUED)
4–4 Remove the Rectifier Block
1. Retain position of the cables terminals 1 .

The two AC/DC
2. With a Phillips head screw driver, disconnect the 3 Connections
cables 1 coming from the EMC Board 3 Phases.
3. With the Allen key 5 mm, unscrew the 2 screws 2

holding the rectifier to the chassis and remove the Rectifier Block
rectifier. The two
cables to the 2
AC/DC Board
CAUTION Be careful to preserve the special grease that is spread between the Rectifier
Block and the chassis. This grease, called: Conductive Surface Compound, pro-
vides both thermal and electrical conductivity that is important in reducing failure
of the rectifier.
5 REASSEMBLY
Reverse the disassembly procedures to reinstall the AC/DC 3 Phase Mid Power Assembly. Tighten the 10 mm cable
retaining nuts to 3 N.m (30 kg.cm), and the 5.5 mm hex head screws to 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm).
CAUTION Ensure cables terminals are repositioned as noticed before.
Verify that the + and - DC Bus cables are not reversed before power on to prevent
CAUTION
damage to the Inverter. Refer to Illustration 1 , 1 .
CAUTION
Verify that the + and - from the rectifier block are not reversed. Refer to Illustration
1 ,2 .
6 VERIFY
Reapply power and verify that the system functions correctly.
Put the cover back.

REV 13 5116374
6-4 INVERTER COILS MID POWER ASSEMBLY, OR CAPACITOR INVERTER ASSEMBLY

1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
10 mm allen wrench.
13 mm socket with ratchet.
Large phillips screwdriver.
Cutting pliers.

DANGER
4 PREREQUISITES
three screws on the EMC cover must be removed before handling the Power unit.

REV 13 5116374
6-4 INVERTER COILS MID POWER ASSEMBLY, OR CAPACITOR INVERTER ASSEMBLY (CONTINUED)
5 PROCEDURE
Note: It is recommended to take the complete unit down to be able to replace the Inverter coil assem-
bly or the Inverter Capacitor assembly safely.
5–1 Separate Inverter / HV Tank Assembly

Follow instructions in Disassembly / Reassembly Procedure of ”Inverter Assembly” § 5-1 to §5-3-3 to
separate the Inverter / HV tank assembly from the Heat sink mounting bracket/EMC/ACDC assembly.
Proceed to § 5-2 for Inverter Coil Assembly Replacement or § 5-3 for Inverter capacitor Assembly
Replacement.
5–2 Inverter Coil Assembly Replacement

5–2–1 Disassembly
1. Cut the tie-wraps retaining the DC cable and Heater cable.
2. Disconnect the heater cable from the HV tank 1
Illustration 1- Front view

REV 13 5116374
3. Remove the 10 mm and 13 mm screws 1 ,2 ,3 from the Capacitor assembly. Retain the washers.
1 3 2 1
6
5
4 5
Illustration 2-
4. Remove the three 5.5 mm screws 4 to free the Inverter assembly and its cover.
5. Remove the screws to free the three cables from the IGBT (refer to Illustration 3, 2 )
6. Remove the left and right 5.5 mm screws 5 holding the coil assembly.
7. Remove the left and right 5.5 mm screws 6 holding the capacitor assembly, push and bend it slightly
downwards to leave room for the coil assembly.
8. Remove the coil assembly (refer to Illustration 3, 1 ).

REV 13 5116374
5–2–2 Reassembly
1. Present the new coil assembly 1 .
2. Mount the 5.5 mm screw in the middle hole on each side, to hold the assembly coil (refer to Illustration 2, 5 ).
A
3. Remount the three cables on the IGBT

2 , using the phillips screwdriver. A
There is a locking washer between the

screws and the cables.
Tighten firmly to 3 N.m (30 kg.cm).
WARNING
RESPECT THE ORIEN-
TATION OF THE
CABLES TO THE IGBTS
CONNECTIONS TO
AVOID Q100C CABLE
CONTACT WITH TOP
COVER.
Illustration 3-

REV 13 5116374
4. Mount the 5.5 mm screws in the middle hole on each side, to hold the Capacitor assembly (refer to Illustration
2, 6 ).
5. Reset the Inverter assembly and its cover, and mount the three 3
5.5 mm screws (refer to Illustration 2, 4 ).

6. Present the angle-shaped cover and mount the six lateral
5.5 mm screws on the frame and the HV tank 3 .
7. Present the coil cables,
- Remount them along with the DC bus cables with the 13 mm screws (refer to Illustration 2, 1 ).
Tighten to torque 10 N.m (approx. 100 kgf.cm).
- Remount with the 10 mm screw, the coil cable (refer to Illustration 2, 2 or Illustration 4, 4 )
and the remaining cable (refer to Illustration 2, 3 or Illustration 4, 4 ) on the current

transformer of the capacitor assembly. Tighten to torque 4 N.m (40 kg.cm).
4
Illustration 4-
8. Reconnect the heater cable on the HV tank (refer to Illustration 1, 1 ).

REV 13 5116374
9. Tighten all 5.5 mm screws between 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm), (refer to Illustration 2, 4 , 5 , 6 ) to make
sure that the remaining threads are in the middle of the holes. (Position the front cover to ensure screw pass-
through, then remove it).
10. Reposition the DC cable and Heater cable and attach them with new tie-wraps from the first-aid spare bag.
11. Perform a final inspection, tighten all screws between 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm) and go to §6 of this
procedure.

REV 13 5116374
5–3 Inverter Capacitor Assembly Replacement

5–3–1 Disassembly
1. Cut the tie-wraps retaining the DC cable and Heater cable.
2. Disconnect the Heater cable from the HV tank 1 .

3. Disconnect the Inverter current feedback cable (J1) from the Gate Command board
4. Remove the 10 mm and 13 mm screws 2 , 3 , 4 on the top side, and the three 13 mm screws 5 on the
lower side of the Capacitor assembly. Retain the washers.
5. Remove the four left and right 5.5 mm screws (refer to Illustration 2, 6 ) holding the Capacitor assembly.
6. Remove the Capacitor assembly 6 .
2 3 4 2
5–3–2 Reassembly
1. Present the Capacitor assembly.
2. Mount the four 5.5 mm screws (refer to Illustration 2, 6 ) on each side to maintain the Capacitor assembly.
Tighten them between 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm).

REV 13 5116374
3. Remount all cables that were removed (refer to section 5–3–1)
4. Pass the two cables from the B

parallel resonant coil as
indicated. A
A
- Attach the shorter wire on the
B
pass through the current
transformer with the 10 mm
screw and its washers A .

Tighten to torque 4 N.m (40
kg.cm).
- Attach the longer wire on the
central capacitor of the
capacitor inverter with the 13
mm screws and their washers,
together with the two primary
HV transformer flat wires (the Overhead view
two with a white spot or ring 2 2
mark).
Tighten to torque 10 N.m (approx.100 kgf.cm).
B A

REV 13 5116374
5. Reposition the DC cable and Heater cable, and attach them with new tie-wraps from the first-aid spare bag.
6. Reconnect the heater cable on the HV tank.
7. Perform the final inspection, tighten all screws.
6 REASSEMBLE THE POWER UNIT

Follow the instructions in Disassembly / Reassembly Procedure of ”Inverter Assembly”, §6-2 to §6-3 to reassemble
the Inverter / HV tank assembly to the Heat sink/mounting bracket/EMC/ACDC assembly.
7 VERIFY
It is recommended that you perform the ”Inverter in short circuit” diagnostics test on the Inverter.
Verify correct operation at all application ranges.

REV 1 5116374
SECTION 7 - X-RAY GENERATOR COMPONENTS - IV
7-1 LV POWER SUPPLY 3 PHASE BOARD

1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
5.5 mm hex nut driver or socket wrench with ratchet.
DANGER BEFORE ANY MANUAL INTERVENTION, ENSURE THE MAIN POWER IS OFF.
1. Insure that the Neon (orange) indicator light on the board has gone out.
2. Be careful touching components on this board. Some become very hot.
4 PREREQUISITES
The LV Power Supply 3 Phase Board is in the Jedi Generator Auxiliary Unit (10 kg).
On the Auxiliary Unit, disconnect internal CAN cable, DC BUS, heater cable, 115V and Tube cable.
Remove the Auxiliary Unit from the gantry and place it on a flat surface.
7-1 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374
7-1 LV POWER SUPPLY 3 PHASE BOARD (CONTINUED)
5 PROCEDURE
5–1 Remove Cover
Unscrew the sixteen 5.5 mm hex head screws and

remove the cover on the Auxiliary Unit.
5–2 Remove Cables Auxiliary Unit
Disconnect the 3 cables from the LV Power Supply 3 Phase board 1 , 2 , 3 .
5–3 Remove the LV Power Supply

Board
Unscrew the six 5.5 mm hex head screws and
remove the LV Power Supply 3 Phase board.
1
6 REASSEMBLY
Reverse the disassembly procedures to reinstall
the LV Power Supply 3 Phase Board.
LV Power
CAUTION Verify that the following Supply 3
cables are not reversed Phases
Board
before power ON:
1. + and - DC BUS cable, 2 3 2

2. 160V and 0V cable, 3 .
7-2 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374
7-1 LV POWER SUPPLY 3 PHASE BOARD (CONTINUED)

Remount the auxiliary unit on the gantry.
7 VERIFY
Verify that the system functions correctly.
Remount the cover. Tighten the 5.5 mm hex head screws to 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm).
7-3 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374
7-2 FILAMENT BOARD 1 INVERTER

1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
5.5 mm nut driver or socket wrench with ratchet

DANGER
1. Insure that the Neon (orange) indicator light on the board has gone out.
2. Be careful touching components on this board. Some become very hot.
4 PREREQUISITES
The Filament board is in the Jedi Generator Auxiliary Unit (10 kg).
7-4 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374
7-2 FILAMENT BOARD 1 INVERTER (CONTINUED)
5 PROCEDURE
5–1 Remove Cover
Unscrew the sixteen 5.5 mm hex head screws and remove the cover on the Auxiliary
Unit.

Auxiliary Unit
1. Disconnect the ribbon cable between the
Filament Board and the LVPS Board 1 .
2. Disconnect 2 .
1
3. Disconnect the J2 connector 3 .
5–3 Remove the Filament Board

Unscrew the six 5.5 mm hex head screws and
remove the board.
Filament
Board
1 Inverter
6 REASSEMBLY
2 3
Reverse the disassembly procedures to reinstall
the Filament Board 1 Inv.
CAUTION
Verify that the 160V and 0V cable 2 is not reversed before power ON.
7 VERIFY
Run Heater Function Diagnostics.
7-5 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374
7-3 ROTATION BOARD HIGH SPEED

1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
5.5 mm nut driver or socket wrench with ratchet

DANGER
4 PREREQUISITES
The Rotation board is in the Jedi Generator Auxiliary Unit (10 kg).
7-6 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374
7-3 7–3ROTATION BOARD HIGH SPEED (CONTINUED)
5 PROCEDURE
5–1 Remove Cover
Unscrew the sixteen 5.5 mm hex head screws and remove the cover on the
Auxiliary Unit.
Auxiliary Unit
ENSURE THAT POWER IS REMOVED, INCLUDING 115V FAN SUPPLY.

WARNING
3 4
1. Disconnect the ribbon cable 1 between the
LVPS board and the Rotation Board High Speed. Rotation
Board High 2
Speed
2. Disconnect the two wires from the capacitors 2 .
1
3. Disconnect 3
5–3 Remove the Rotation Board

1. Unscrew the eight 5.5 mm hex head screws
around the edges of the board,
2. Unscrew the two 5.5 mm hex head screws that are
in holes below the surface of the board 4 that

secure an IGBT.
3. Remove the board.
7-7 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374
7-3 ROTATION BOARD HIGH SPEED (CONTINUED)
CAUTION
Be careful to preserve the special grease that is spread between the IGBT and a
heat sink under the Rotation Board. This grease, called: Conductive Surface
Compound, provides both thermal and electrical conductivity that is important in
reducing failure of the IGBT.
6 REASSEMBLY
Reverse the disassembly procedures to reinstall the Rotation Board High Speed.
Ensure that cables 1 are correctly connected. Ensure that marks on the cables
CAUTION
match the marks on the board.
7 VERIFY
Run Heater Function Diagnostics.
7-8 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374
7-4 ROTATION CAPACITOR SET 23/23

1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
5.5 mm hex nut driver or socket wrench with ratchet.
Cutting pliers.
DANGER BEFORE ANY MANUAL INTERVENTION, ENSURE THE MAIN POWER IS OFF.
4 PREREQUISITES
The Rotation Capacitors are in the Jedi Generator Auxiliary Unit (10 kg).
7-9 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 1 5116374
7-4 ROTATION CAPACITORS SET 23/23 (CONTINUED)
5 PROCEDURE
5–1 Remove LV Power Supply Cover
Unscrew the sixteen 5.5 mm hex head screws and remove the cover on the
Auxiliary Unit.
Auxiliary Unit
5–2 Remove the Rotation Capacitors
1
1. Cut the tie-wraps 1
2. Disconnect both capacitors 2 2

Rotation
3. Remove the two Rotor Capacitors. Capacitors 1
6 REASSEMBLY
Reverse the disassembly procedures to
reinstall the Rotor Capacitors.
Use the tie–wraps from the Accessory Spares Set to reattach the capacitors.

REV 1 5116374
7-4 ROTATION CAPACITORS SET 23/23 (CONTINUED)
1 2
Ensure that the capacitors are correctly connected :
- connect with cable 2215658 CF9 and CF10 to the below pins of the left capacitor 12.6 µF 1
- connect with cable 2215659 CF11 and CF12 to the upper pins of the right capacitor 10.5 µF 2
7 VERIFY

REV 1 5116374
7-5 REPLACE NONVOLATILE PARAMETERS RAM

1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
Remove power from the system before beginning work.
Check that the power is off.
4 PREREQUISITES
Upload the database that is stored in the RAM before starting the replacement procedure.

REV 1 5116374
7-5 REPLACE NONVOLATILE PARAMETERS RAM (CONTINUED)
5 PROCEDURE
5–1 Remove Cover
Unscrew the twelve 5.5 mm hex head screws on three sides (4 screws on each side;
top, right, left in photo) and remove the front cover of the Power Unit.
Front View
5–2 Remove and Replace the RAM
Note the direction that the RAM faces, then grasp it between your thumb and forefinger and pull it directly away from
its support on the board.
Insert the new Nonvolatile Parameters RAM in its place. Be careful to insert it facing in the same direction.
U32
kV
Control
Board
Nonvolatile kV Control Board

Parameters
RAM
Refer to the Central Listing for more details.
5–3 Download Database

Reapply power.
Download the database. Check that the system functions correctly.
5–4 Replace Cover

Replace front cover tightening the twelve 5.5 mm hex head screws to 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm).

blank

REV 10 5116374
PDU
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 - PDU2 (2298852/2298849) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 FAN ASSY (FOR 200V PDU ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-2 POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-3 RMT CNT BOARD ASSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-4 EMERGENCY SWITCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-5 CIRCUIT BREAKER (CB1 / CB2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-5-1 Circuit Breaker (CB1/CB2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-5-2 400V Circuit Breaker_CB1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-6 CIRCUIT BREAKER (CB2 / CB3 / CB4 / CB5 / CB6/ CB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1-7 CONTACTOR (K1 / K2 / K3 / K11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1-8 FUSE F1 (3 FUSES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1-9 INDICATOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
i PDU
ii PDU
REV 10 5116374
SECTION 1 - PDU2 (2298852/2298849)
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
Illustration 1-1 Parts Location
PDU2 400V PDU2 200V
EMERGENCY SW ?
F1
F1
SW LED
(Indicator
CB2 Ass.)
? ??
RMT CNT
CB2
CB1
K3
CB1
??
POWER
SUPPLY
CB7
CB6
K2 ?
CB5
CB4
K11 K1 CB3
1-1 PDU
REV 10 5116374
1-1 FAN ASSY (FOR 200V PDU ONLY)
Special Equipment
• Fan Assy
• Tie wraps
3. Remove the PDU top cover by unscrewing its 2 screws, pulling the cover backward and lifting it up .
4. Remove the PDU rear cover by unscrewing its 2 screws.
5. Disconnect the power cable leading from the Fan Assy.
6. Remove the Fan Assy from the frame by unscrewing its 4 screws.
8. Restore the PDU to original configuration.
9. END
Illustration 1-2 Fan Assy (PDU2 200V)

Long Screw (x2) Top Cover
Fan Assy
Rear Cover
Screw (x2)
Nut (x4)
1-2 PDU
REV 10 5116374
1-2 POWER SUPPLY
Special Equipment
• Power Supply Assy
• Tie wraps
3. Remove the PDU front cover by unscrewing its 2 screws.
4. Remove the protective plastic guard from the side board by unscrewing 2 screws.
6. Unscrew the 4 support screws, take the Power Supply forward and out of the PDU.
7. Install the new Power Supply by referring to steps 6 through 4.
8. Verify that wiring is correctly connected.
10. END
1-3 PDU
REV 10 5116374
1-3 RMT CNT BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• RMT CNT Board Assy (2301670-2)
• Tie wraps
4. Disconnect the cable connectors (J1 ∼ J8) from the RMT CNT Board Assy.
5. Remove the RMT CNT Board Assy by unscrewing its 5 screws.
6. Install the new RMT CNT Board Assy by referring to steps 5 through 4.
7. Check the RMT CNT Board jumper configuration according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional check &
Adjustment, Switch/Jumper Setting of Boards/Devices.
9. END
Illustration 1-3 RMT CNT Board Assy Removal
Screw
Screws
Screws
1-4 PDU
REV 10 5116374
1-4 EMERGENCY SWITCH
Special Equipment
• Emergency Switch
4. Remove the PDU top cover by unscrewing its 2 nuts.
5. Disconnect the wires from the Emergency Switch.
6. Remove the switch (see illustration 1-4).
7. Remove the switch cover by unscrewing ring nut.
8. Install the new Emergency Switch by referring to steps 8 through 5.
10. END
Illustration 1-4 Emergency Switch Removal
Switch
Switch Cover
Ring Nut
1-5 PDU
REV 10 5116374
1-5 CIRCUIT BREAKER (CB1 / CB2)
PDU Circuit Breaker Replacement Part Old Part Refer to
CB1 2298746 2298746 1-5-1

PDU2 200V
CB2 2298757 2298757 1-6
2249421 2249421 1-5-1
CB1 5224927 (Breaker Service Kit) 2249421 1-5-2
2249421-2 2249421-2 1-5-3

PDU2 400V
2315868 2315868 1-5-1
CB2 5224926 (Breaker Service Kit) 2315868 1-5-4
2315868-2 2315868-2 1-5-5
1-6 PDU
REV 10 5116374
1-5-1 Circuit Breaker (CB1/CB2)

Note
Replacement procedure for CB2 of PDU2 200V, refer to 1-6 Circuit Breaker (CB2 / CB3 / CB4 / CB5
/ CB6 / CB7) section.
Special Equipment
• Circuit Breaker
4. Remove the wires from the defective Circuit Breaker.
5. Remove the defective Circuit Breaker by unscrewing its 4 screws.
6. Install the new Circuit Breaker by referring to steps 5 through 4.
7. Verify that the wires are securely connected.
9. END
Illustration 1-5 Circuit Breaker (CB1/CB2)
Circuit Breaker (CB1 / CB2)
Screw (x4)
1-7 PDU
REV 10 5116374
1-5-2 400V Circuit Breaker_CB1
Special Equipment
• Circuit Breaker: order 5224927 (Breaker Service Kit) to replace 2249421
• Hair Drier
4. Disconnect the cable connectors from the defective Circuit Breaker.
5. Disconnect the cable connectors from the K1 and scrap three cables (2298664, 2298665 and 2298666).
7. Install the Moeller Bracket (5189217) on the Board (2295895) by screwing its 4 screws (N9414JS) and 4 Wash-
ers (N9401WS).
Illustration 1-6 Install the Moeller Bracket on the Board_400V
Board_400V
Board_400V
Screw (x4) 2295895
nt N9414JS
Fro
Moeller Bracket
5189217
1-8 PDU
REV 10 5116374
1-5-2 400V Circuit Breaker_CB1 (Continued)

8. Assemble the new CB1.
Illustration 1-7 CB1
For CB1
a. Remove barriers from the Circuit Breaker.

From the back of the Circuit Breaker, use thumb pressure to push or an appropriate tool to gently tap each
side of the barrier to help slide it out.
Illustration 1-8 Remove the Barrier from the Circuit Breaker
Barrier
(x2)
1-9 PDU
REV 10 5116374

b. Replace Pressure Clamp Connectors and install Connector Pads on the Circuit Breaker.
Illustration 1-9 Replace Pressure Clamp Connectors and Install Connector Pads
Remove Old Pressure

Clamp Connector (x6)
Install new Pressure

Clamp Connector (x6)
4 Install Connector
Pads (x6)
1-10 PDU
REV 10 5116374

9. Open the plastic protect cover on the Circuit Breaker, then set parameter of Breaker.
• CB1 parameter:
Irip: 7
Amps: 70
Illustration 1-10 Open the Plastic Protect Cover
10. Install the new CB1 and the Moeller Insulated Plate (5197964) by screwing its two screws.
The Moeller Insulated Plate (5197964) is installed between the Moeller Bracket and the Circuit Breaker.
11. Connect new cables (2298664-2, 2298665-2 and 2298666-2) between CB1 and K1.
Note
Add heat shrink pipes to every cable connector before connecting cable connectors to CB1. Then
heat up heat shrink pipes with Hair Drier to let them shrink and pack connector in full.
12. Connect the cable connectors to the CB1. (Illustration shown as below)
Illustration 1-11 Circuit Breaker Installation
Heat Shrink
Pipe (x6)
CB1 2298664-2 2298665-2 2298666-2

& 2298713 K1 & 2298715 & 2298718
1-11 PDU
REV 10 5116374

13. Verify that the cables are securely connected.
15. END
1-12 PDU
REV 10 5116374
Special Equipment
• Circuit Breaker: 2249421-2
• Hair Drier
4. Carefully rip off heat shrink pipes from the cable connectors, do not damage cable connector.
7. Refer to Section 1-5-2, Step 8 to Step 9 to set the new CB1.
9. Add heat shrink pipes to every cable connector before connecting cable connectors to CB1.
10. Connect cable connectors to the CB1. (See Illustration 1-11)
11. Heat up heat shrink pipes with Hair Drier to let them shrink and pack connector in full.
14. END
1-13 PDU
REV 10 5116374
Special Equipment
• Circuit Breaker: order 5224926 (Breaker Service Kit) to replace 2298721
6. Install the Moeller Bracket (5189217) on the Board (2295895) by screwing its 4 screws (N9414JS) and 4 Wash-
ers (N9401WS). (Refer to Illustration 1-6)
7. Assemble the new CB2.
For CB2
Auxiliary Contact
1-14 PDU
REV 10 5116374

a. Open the front cover of the Circuit Breaker by unscrewing its two screws.
b. Install the Auxiliary Contact on the Circuit Breaker.
• Cut the plastic patch of the left side of the Circuit Breaker with the plier.
Illustration 1-13 Cut the Plastic Patch from the Circuit Breaker
Screw (x2)
Cut this place
• Install the Auxiliary Contact refer to illustration shown as below.
Illustration 1-14 Install the Auxiliary Contact
Auxiliary
Contact
1-15 PDU
REV 10 5116374

c. Close the front cover of the Circuit Breaker by screwing its two screws.
Screw (x2)
Auxiliary
Contact
8. Open the plastic protect cover on the Circuit Breaker, then set parameter of Breaker. (Refer to Illustration 1-10)
• CB2 parameter:
Irip: 9.5
Amps: 40
10. Connect the cable connectors to the CB2. (Refer to Illustration 1-11)
13. END
1-16 PDU
REV 10 5116374
Special Equipment
• Circuit Breaker: 2315868-2
6. Refer to Section 1-5-4, Step 7 to Step 8 to set the new CB2.
8. Connect the cable connectors to the CB2. (See Illustration 1-11)
11. END
1-17 PDU
REV 10 5116374
1-6 CIRCUIT BREAKER (CB2 / CB3 / CB4 / CB5 / CB6/ CB7)
Special Equipment
• Circuit Breaker
• Tie wraps
4. Mark and remove the wires from the defective Circuit Breaker by unscrewing its screws.
5. Remove the defective Circuit Breaker from the support bracket by tilting the Release Plectrum on the bottom.
6. Install the new Circuit Breaker by referring to steps 5 through 4.
7. Verify that wires are correctly connected.
9. END
Illustration 1-16 Circuit breaker
Release Plectrum
1-18 PDU
REV 10 5116374
1-7 CONTACTOR (K1 / K2 / K3 / K11)
Special Equipment
• Contactor
• Tie wraps
4. Mark and remove the wires from the defective Contactor.
5. Remove the defective Contactor by unscrewing its 4 screws.
6. Install the new Contactor by referring to steps 5 through 4.
7. Verify that wires are correctly connected.
9. END
Illustration 1-17 Contactor (K1 / K2 / K3 / K11)
Screw (x4)
1-19 PDU
REV 10 5116374
1-8 FUSE F1 (3 FUSES)
Special Equipment
• F1 (3 fuses)
4. Remove Fuse Protective Cover by unscrewing 4 screws.
Illustration 1-18 Fuse Protective Cover removal
Fuse F1
Fuse Protective Cover
Window for
Blowout Indicator
Screw
(x4)
1-20 PDU
REV 10 5116374
1-8 FUSE F1 (3 FUSES) (CONTINUED)

5. Verify the blowout indicator has been protruding. And remove the Fuses from the Fuse Holder by unscrewing
2 screws.
6. Replace the new Fuses in Fuse Holder.
Illustration 1-19 Fuses F1 replacement
Do NOT reverse
the direction
Note:
M8 Allen screws x 6
Allen screws Torque:22.3Nm
(22.3Nm torque) (is not necessary to loose
when replacing the fuses)
Blowout
Indicator
F1 (X3)
Fuse F1
Allen screws
(22.3Nm torque)
Note
Fasten the Allen screws that hold the F1 fuses with 22.Nm torque.
Note
Even in case of that only one fuse is burnt, all fuses must be replaced at once.
The Fuses should be set as illustration above.
8. END
1-21 PDU
REV 10 5116374
1-9 INDICATOR ASSEMBLY
Special Equipment
• Indicator assembly
4. Remove the indicator assembly, and install the new one.
6. END
1-22 PDU
REV 1 5116374
APPENDIX A - SYMBOLS AND CLASSIFICATION
Symbol Publication Description

417-5032 Alternating Current
335-1 Three-phase Alternating Current

3
335-1 Three-phase Alternating Current with neutral

conductor
3N
Direct Current
417-5019 Protective Earth (Ground)
348 Attention, consult ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTS
417-5008 OFF (Power: disconnection from the mains)
417-5007 ON (Power: connection to the mains)
Warning, HIGH VOLTAGE
Emergency Stop
A-1
REV 1 5116374
Symbol Publication Description
Type B
417-5339 X-ray Source Assembly Emitting
417-5009 Standby
Start
Table Set
Abort
Intercom
(on Operator Console)

Power On: light on
Standby: light off
Warning sign :
Radiation of Laser Apparatus
A-2
REV 1 5116374
Symbol Description
Microphone (Mic)
Contrast
Brightness
60°C System storage prior to installation:

Maintain storage temperature between -10° C and +50° C
-10°C
System storage prior to installation:

Maintain non-condensing storage
humidity below 90%
DO NOT store system longer than 90 days
Humidity 5-95%
Excluding Condensation
Air Pressure System storage and shipment:

Maintain Air Pressure between 700 and 1060hPa
700-1060hPa
A-3
REV 1 5116374
CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT
Any permanently installed equipment containing operator or patient accessible surfaces must provide backup
protection against electric shock,in case the BASIC INSULATION fails. In addition to BASIC INSULATION,Class1
equipment contains a direct connection to a PROTECTIVE(EARTH) CONDUCTOR which prevents shocks when a
person touches a broken piece of equipment or touches two different equipment surfaces simultaneously.
TYPE B EQUIPMENT
CLASS I, II, or III EQUIPMENT or EQUIPMENT with INTERNAL ELECTRICAL POWER SOURCES provide an
adequate degree of protection against electric shock arising from (allowable) LEAKAGE CURRENTS or a
breakdown in the reliability of the protective earth connection.
ORDINARY EQUIPMENT
Enclosed EQUIPMENT without protection against the ingress of water.
OPERATION 0f EQUIPMENT
CONTINUOUS OPERATION WITH INTERMITTENT LOADING.
Operation in which EQUIPMENT is connected continuously to the SUPPLY MAINS.The stated permissible loading
time is so short that the long term on-load operating temperature is not attained.The ensuing interval in loading is,
however, not sufficiently long for cooling down to the long term no-load operating temperature.
EQUIPMENT not suitable for use in the presence of a FLAMMABLE ANESTHETIC MIXTURE WITH AIR or WITH
OXYGEN or NITROUS OXIDE
CLEANING
The system is NOT WATERPROOF. It is NOT designed to protect internal components against the ingress of
liquids.Clean external system surfaces(Gantry,table,consoles and accessories)with a soft cloth dipped in hot water
and wrung DAMP/DRY. (NOT dripping!) IF NECESSARY, use only mild (dish washing liquid) soap to remove dirt.
NOTICE
Avoid damage to equipment! Some îspray and wipeîcleaners etch and permanently cloud
clear plastic surfaces!! Use only warm water and mild liquid soap to clean surfaces.
A-4
www.gehealthcare.com
Imagination at work

Component Replacement 5116374_18

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Component Replacement 5116374_18

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Component Replacement 5116374_18

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Healthcare

HiSpeed Dual, ProSpeed FII

Copyright © 2004-2011 by General Electric Company

VÝSTRAHA • Tento provozní návod existuje pouze v anglickém jazyce.

ADVARSEL • Denne servicemanual findes kun på engelsk.

WAARSCHUWING • Deze onderhoudshandleiding is enkel in het Engels verkrijgbaar.

WARNING • This Service Manual is available in English only.

HOIATUS • Käesolev teenindusjuhend on saadaval ainult inglise keeles.

VAROITUS • Tämä huolto-ohje on saatavilla vain englanniksi.

ATTENTION • Ce manuel de service n'est disponible qu'en anglais.

WARNUNG • Diese Serviceanleitung existiert nur in Englischer Sprache.

ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ • Το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις διατίθεται στα αγγλικά μόνο.

FIGYELMEZTETÉS • Ezen karbantartási kézikönyv kizárólag angol nyelven érhető el.

AÐVÖRUN • Þessi þjónustuhandbók er eingöngu fáanleg á ensku.

AVVERTENZA • Il presente manuale di manutenzione è disponibile soltanto in inglese.

경고 • 본 서비스 지침서는 영어로만 이용하실 수 있습니다 .

BRDINJUMS • Šī apkalpes rokasgrāmata ir pieejama tikai angļu valodā.

ĮSPĖJIMAS • Šis eksploatavimo vadovas yra prieinamas tik anglų kalba.

ADVARSEL • Denne servicehåndboken finnes bare på engelsk.

OSTRZEŻENIE • Niniejszy podręcznik serwisowy dostępny jest jedynie w języku angielskim.

ATENÇÃO • Este manual de assistência técnica só se encontra disponível em inglês.

ATENÇÃO • Este manual de assistência técnica só se encontra disponível em inglês.

ATENŢIE • Acest manual de service este disponibil numai în limba engleză.

ОСТОРОЖНО! • Данное руководство по обслуживанию предлагается только на английском

UPOZORENJE • Ovo servisno uputstvo je dostupno samo na engleskom jeziku.

UPOZORNENIE • Tento návod na obsluhu je k dispozícii len v angličtine.

ATENCION • Este manual de servicio sólo existe en inglés.

VARNING • Den här servicehandboken finns bara tillgänglig på engelska.

DIKKAT • Bu servis kilavuzunun sadece ingilizcesi mevcuttur.

ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕН • Това упътване за работа е налично само на английски език.

UPOZORENJE • Ovaj servisni priručnik dostupan je na engleskom jeziku.

OPOZORILO • Ta servisni priročnik je na voljo samo v angleškem jeziku.

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

LITHIUM BATTERY CAUTIONARY STATEMENTS

OMISSIONS & ERRORS

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Tab - Section Page REV 4 (Table) i to ii 9

Title page 18 LCT TABLE (2297024/2302759) 1-1 to 1-53 18

SCSI TOWER ASSY 5-1 to 5-5 15 X-RAY GENERATOR 5-1 to 5-15

Table Updated cradle potentiometer resistance from 500±100Ω to 125±50Ω.

12 05/09/08 OC Updated Host Computer replacement procedure. (Sec. 3 & Sec. 4)

10 06/08/07 OC Updated error. (Sec. 3 & Sec. 4)

Updated error. (Sec. 3, Sec. 6 and Sec. 8)

PDU Added circuit breaker replacement for PDU2 400V.

9 12/25/06 Table Added Cradle Potentiometer Pulley Metal Cable Replacement.

7 05/16/06 OC Updated fan replacement and PS replacement. (Sec. 1)

6 03/06/06 OC Updated Host Computer replacement. (Sec. 2)

Updated error. (Sec. 1)

DAS/Detector Added GDAS information. (Sec. 2)

5 08/22/05 OC Added HP xw8000 to HP xw8200 upgrade procedures (Sec. 2).

Gantray Updated installation of Gantry Cover (Sec. 1)

4 07/27/05 OC Add HPxw8200 Host CPU illustration 2-4 (Sec.2)

3 06/21/05 OC Changed the wrong illustration 3-1. (Sec. 3)

X-ray Generator Added Torque information to Illustration 3-5. (Sec. 3)

1 10/15/04 Initial Release

SECTION 1 - BIG OC ASSY (HiSpeed Dual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

SECTION 2 - SMALL OC ASSY (ProSpeed FII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

SECTION 3 - HOST ASSY (HiSpeed Dual, BIG OC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1